CONTROLS for Your BMW M8 4 Door First Generation (2019-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Power windows, all 109  
Memory function 126  
2
Power windows, individual 109  
6
7
Central locking system 97  
Unlocking  
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 124  
Opening/closing trunk lid 102  
Locking  
Lights  
5
Seating comfort features  
30  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Light switch 177  
Manual Speed Limiter 228  
Lights off  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise Control on/off 230  
Daytime driving lights 179  
Parking lights 178  
Automatic headlight control 177  
Adaptive lighting functions 179  
With Steering Assistant 243:  
Cruise Control, Distance Control  
and lane keeping on/off  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
180  
Low-beam headlights 178  
Cruise Control: store the speed  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed 241  
Instrument lighting 182  
Interrupt or continue cruise control  
Right roadside parking light 178  
Left roadside parking light 178  
Active Cruise Control: increase  
distance  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-  
tance  
8
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 143  
Cruise Control rocker switch  
Activate M1 217  
11  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 144  
12 Instrument cluster 156  
13 Activate M2 217  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
180  
Widgets 159  
Trip data 172  
14 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Selection lists 171  
9
Shift paddles  
10 Steering wheel buttons, left  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Voice activation system 51  
31  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Wipers 144  
Rain sensor 145  
Knurled wheel for selection lists 171  
15 Wiper lever  
Cleaning the windshield 146  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Horn, entire surface  
Steering wheel heating 126  
Adjusting the steering wheel 126  
Unlocking the hood 343  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 47  
32  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
2
Hazard warning system 358  
Intelligent Safety 189  
10  
M MODE 218  
SETUP 217  
Sound control 155  
3
4
5
6
Ventilation 283  
Glove compartment 299  
Automatic climate control 278  
11  
Turning the drive-ready state  
on/off 137  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-  
cation 6  
12  
Auto Start/Stop function 137  
Parking assistance systems 251  
Panorama View 270  
7
Controller with buttons 47  
8
Opening and closing the  
convertible top 110  
Air collar 128  
Dynamic Stability Control 222  
9
Parking brake 140  
Automatic Hold 141  
13 M Steptronic Sport transmission selector  
lever 147  
33  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 360  
3
4
Reading lights 183  
Interior lights 183  
2
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 188  
34  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
Front camera  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Overview  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
Cameras behind the windshield  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
The cameras behind the windshield are lo-  
cated near the interior mirror.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well  
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.  
35  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield: if the cam-  
Top view cameras  
era has overheated and been temporarily  
switched off due to excessively high tem-  
peratures.  
Camera behind the windshield: during cali-  
bration of the camera immediately after ve-  
hicle delivery.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rearview camera  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
The rearview camera is located in the trunk lid  
handle.  
Front radar sensor  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not be fully operational and  
may provide incorrect information in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
The front radar sensor is located in the front  
bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.  
▷
When it is dark outside.  
36  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers  
The radar sensors are located to the side in  
the front bumper.  
The ultrasonic sensors for Park  
Distance Control are located in  
the front and rear bumpers.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
The radar sensors are located to the side be-  
hind the rear bumper.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The radar sensors may be restricted or not  
available in the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors for Parking Assistant  
are located to the side in the front and rear  
bumpers.  
▷
▷
If sensors are dirty such as due to icing.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a number plate baseplate.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
37  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
For objects with fine surfaces or objects like  
fences, plants, or bushes.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
In automatic car washes.  
On uneven surfaces such as speed bumps.  
Due to heavy exhaust.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
38  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
General information  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Idle state  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
39  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Automatic idle state  
For instance, the idle state is automatically es-  
tablished under the following conditions:  
Standby state  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
Standby, manual  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
the driver and front passenger must exit the  
vehicle.  
Via button on the radio  
Press the button on the radio.  
The control display and the in-  
strument cluster illuminate.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Via start/stop button  
Press the Start/Stop button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
Manual idle state  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Press and hold the button on  
the radio until the OFF indicator  
on the instrument cluster goes  
out.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. The drivetrain is  
switched off and standby state  
switched on.  
40  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Drive-ready state  
NOTICE  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage  
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the  
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid  
succession.  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
General information  
Some vehicle functions can only be used with  
the drive-ready state switched on.  
Safety information  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
DANGER  
Principle  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Drive-ready state is switched on  
via the Start/Stop button.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Warning  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-  
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length  
of time.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Gasoline engine  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Depending on the motorization, full drive  
power and the entire rotational speed range  
may not be available for approx. 30 seconds  
after starting the engine. In this case, the vehi-  
cle will not accelerate as usual.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
41  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
▷
Tachometer, refer to page 168.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The activated drive-ready state is indicated  
in the instrument cluster, depending on the  
equipment, by the display of information re-  
quired for driving or the READY display.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the  
vehicle stopped.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
42  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
iDrive  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Input and display  
Main menu  
General information  
The main menu is divided into two areas. The  
left area contains menu items that can be used  
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area  
contains widgets that provide quick access to  
certain functions.  
Operating concept  
Principle  
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-  
ment system and includes a large number of  
functions.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the Controller.  
Media/Radio  
Via the control display.  
All functions of the entertainment system,  
e.g., radio stations or connection with external  
devices.  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Communication  
Safety information  
Phone and message functions, e-mail  
and calendar, and also the connection and  
management of mobile devices such as smart-  
phones.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
Navigation  
Access to the navigation system, desti-  
nation input and traffic bulletins. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest and areas to be avoided.  
43  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
My Car  
ery character entered, with characters being  
added as necessary.  
Information about vehicle status and trips.  
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and  
also administration of driver profiles and range  
of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.  
Entries are continuously compared with data  
stored in the vehicle.  
▷
Only those letters and numbers are offered  
during entry for which data is available.  
Apps  
▷
Destination search: place names can be  
entered in all languages that are available  
in iDrive.  
Management of apps, access to apps and  
vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle  
functions can be purchased from the BMW  
Store.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Several menu items are preceded by a check-  
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func-  
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the  
menu item activates or deactivates the func-  
tion.  
Widgets  
Widgets provide quick access to fre-  
quently used functions. The configured widg-  
ets display dynamic contents such as the nav-  
igation map, and serve as interfaces at the  
same time.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be selected when  
making the destination input, for example.  
Status information  
General information  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment. The  
keyboard's display changes automatically.  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons.  
Icon  
Function  
Telephone icons  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Icon Meaning  
Incoming or outgoing call.  
Missed call.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Signal strength of mobile phone net-  
work.  
Confirm entry.  
Network search.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Mobile phone network is not available.  
The critical charge state of the mobile  
phone has been reached.  
Entry comparison  
When entering names and addresses, the  
selection is gradually narrowed down for ev-  
Roaming is active.  
Locating is active.  
44  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Programmable memory buttons  
Icon Meaning  
SMS text message received.  
General information  
Message received.  
Reminder.  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro-  
grammable memory buttons and called up di-  
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation  
destinations, phone numbers and menu en-  
tries.  
Sending not possible.  
Entertainment icons  
Overview  
Icon  
Meaning  
Bluetooth audio.  
USB device.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Wi-Fi.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Programmable memory buttons  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Storing a function  
Other icons  
A function can be stored on a programmable  
memory button. A button with a stored func-  
tion can be overwritten with another function.  
Icon Meaning  
Check Control message.  
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio  
station.  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Voice activation system active.  
Request for the current vehicle position.  
Checking the current vehicle position.  
Driver profile.  
2.  
Press and hold the desired button  
until the displayed bar on the control dis-  
play has loaded completely.  
Executing a function  
Press the button.  
Notifications.  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Data protection.  
Destination guidance active.  
Passengers on board.  
Do not disturb.  
Displaying the key assignment  
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves  
or use objects.  
45  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in  
the upper area of the control display.  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Deleting all button assignments  
All button assignments can be deleted.  
Warning  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same  
time.  
2. "OK"  
Control display and  
Controller  
Switching on/off automatically  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Principle  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
Overview  
Switching on/off manually  
The control display can also be switched off  
manually.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Screen off"  
Press the Controller or any button on the Con-  
troller to switch it back on again.  
1
Control display  
Controller  
System limits  
2
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Control display  
Safety information  
Warning  
Controller  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
General information  
The buttons can be used to open the menus  
directly. The Controller can be used to select  
menu items and enter the settings.  
46  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
Button Function  
▷
Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-  
ample.  
Call up the Media/Radio menu.  
Call up the Communication menu.  
Call up the navigation map.  
Call up the destination input menu  
for navigation.  
Call up the previous display.  
▷
Press to select a menu item, for example.  
Call up the Options menu.  
Operating via the Controller  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
▷
Tilt in four directions to switch between dis-  
plays, for example.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Selecting a menu  
Buttons on the Controller  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
Button Function  
Call up the main menu.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Go to Apps menu.  
47  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
justed, for instance to remove the entries of  
unused functions from the menu  
Selecting a widget  
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to  
the right.  
1. Select the menu.  
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget  
is selected.  
2. "Personalize menu"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
3. Press the Controller.  
It is also possible to select widgets in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, for instance  
"Settings", a new display appears.  
Adjusting the menu  
▷
Tilt the Controller to the left.  
The current display closes and the previous  
display is shown.  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages  
with widgets and switch between pages. The  
adjustments can only be performed when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
▷
▷
Press the button.  
The previous display re-opens.  
Tilt the Controller to the right.  
The new display opens.  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad-  
justed.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can  
be opened.  
2. Tip the Controller up.  
Going to the Options menu  
The menu items can be used to access addi-  
tional options.  
3. "Adjust main menu"  
4. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷
Icon and select desired widget: add  
new widget.  
Various options are available depending on  
the menu item selected.  
The requested widget will be inserted  
in the relevant position. A maximum of  
four widgets can be displayed per page.  
Press the button.  
Available options are displayed.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Select icon: delete selected widget.  
Add new page: "Add page".  
Delete selected page: "Delete page".  
Adjust the content of the widget: select  
widget.  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
5. "Done"  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Adjusting contents  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the contents  
of the menus "MEDIA" and "COM" can be ad-  
48  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Icon Function  
Press the Controller: delete letters or  
number.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
Entering special characters  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
Input  
Operation  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
Selecting functions  
1. "CAR"  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad. Tap the map on the  
control display and then continue the operation  
using the touchpad.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Function  
Operation  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
49  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
Tap icon and select desired widget:  
add new widget.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
The requested widget will be inserted  
in the relevant position. A maximum of  
four widgets can be displayed per page.  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
▷
▷
▷
Tap on the icon.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
The widget is made larger.  
Tap on the icon.  
The widget is made smaller.  
Tap on the icon.  
Operation via control display  
The widget is deleted.  
Add new page: tap "Add page".  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
▷
▷
Delete selected page: tap "Delete  
page".  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
▷
Adjust content of the widget: tap center  
of widget.  
4. Tap "Done".  
Opening the main menu  
Showing/hiding the display bar  
Tap on the icon.  
In the upper area of the control display, it is  
possible to show or hide a display bar with  
additional functions.  
▷
To show the display bar, pull down the dis-  
play bar at the top edge of the screen.  
▷
To hide the display bar, pull up the display  
bar at the top edge of the screen.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, a new display  
opens.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Adjusting widgets  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can  
be opened.  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages  
with widgets and switch between pages. The  
adjustments can only be performed when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
▷
▷
Swipe to the left.  
Tap arrow.  
The new display opens.  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad-  
justed.  
2.  
Tap the icon in the main menu.  
3. Select the desired adjustment:  
50  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Entering letters and numbers  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Input  
1. A keyboard is displayed on the control dis-  
play when approached.  
Principle  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of  
the vehicle with the automation of processes  
and habits.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
Deleting  
Icon Function  
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or  
number.  
General information  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:  
deletes all letters or numbers.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
▷
▷
▷
Say commands at a normal volume.  
Speaking directly into the microphone does  
not improve the speech recognition.  
Function  
Operation  
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Functional requirements  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 62.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
For the full range of functions, the following  
functions should be activated, set or booked:  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 54.  
▷
For all settings under  
BMW ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual  
on navigation, entertainment, and commu-  
nication.  
51  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Activation word, refer to page 52.  
A driver profile.  
Preset activation word  
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can  
be activated and deactivated.  
Synchronize driver profile, refer to page 70.  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
Activating the voice control system  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
7. "Wake word"  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
Personal activation word  
wheel.  
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello  
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set  
up in the active driver profile. The personal ac-  
tivation word can also be changed or deleted.  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
Say the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or a  
personal activation word.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addi-  
tion such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence. No other commands  
may be available. In this case, operate the  
function via iDrive.  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set wake word"  
9. Select the desired setting.  
Button on the steering wheel  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
Activation word from third-party providers  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants, e.g. Amazon Alexa.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with  
a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In ad-  
dition to the preset or personal activation word,  
Speaking the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or  
the personal activation word will start the sys-  
tem.  
52  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
the activation word from connected third-party  
providers can be used.  
Communication  
For example, when a mobile phone is con-  
nected, calls can be started or SMS can be  
sent.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹  
›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right  
there.‹  
6. "Third-party providers"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Entertainment  
▷
▷
›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹  
›Next title.‹  
Canceling voice control  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
Climate control  
▷
▷
›Turn off the air conditioning.‹  
›I'm cold.‹  
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹  
Tilt the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
Windows and light  
▷
▷
›Open the windows automatically.‹  
Possible commands  
›Delete activation point for automatic power  
window.‹  
General information  
Most contents on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list  
entries. Say list entries as shown.  
▷
›Ambient lighting.‹  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
Instructions can be issued or questions can be  
asked where the Personal Assistant provides  
support.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed or  
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech rec-  
ognition and quality of the feedback may vary.  
Function examples  
›How can the passenger airbag be  
deactivated‹  
Vehicle status and vehicle information  
▷
▷
▷
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Show me the sport displays.‹  
›Open Owner's Manual.‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
Navigation  
▷
›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,  
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹  
▷
▷
›Take me home.‹  
›Are there any traffic messages?‹  
53  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Menu items  
canceled, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
The commands of the menu items are spoken  
just as they are selected via the Controller.  
1. "CAR"  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›MEDIA‹  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
Help for voice control  
Online speech processing  
▷
›Voice commands‹: to have the available  
spoken commands announced.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
▷
›Help‹: have help for the current menu read  
out loud.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Settings  
Setting the voice control  
You can set the system to use standard dialog  
or a short version.  
6. "Online speech processing"  
The short version of the voice control plays  
back short messages in abbreviated form.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
1. "CAR"  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
voice activation system. The function can be  
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
1.  
Press and hold the button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
54  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Automating routines  
General information  
2.  
Release the button.  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic activation of the  
seat heating from a specific outside tempera-  
ture. Rules are created for this purpose, which  
can be activated and deactivated at any time.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Principle  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "APPS"  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
2. "Installed apps"  
3. "Personal assistant"  
4. "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Experience Modes  
Functional requirement  
Principle  
▷
A driver profile is activated.  
The Experience Modes combine different vehi-  
cle functions in the car's interior to an overall  
experience.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
General information  
For example, the selection of a mode harmo-  
nizes the ambient light and seat climate con-  
trol.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the My BMW app and in the vehicle.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
1. "APPS"  
▷
The Experience Modes app is installed in  
the vehicle.  
2. "Installed apps"  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
2. "Experience Modes"  
3. Select the desired mode.  
The mode can be deactivated: "End"  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
55  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
Adjusting the mode  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows  
and convertible top closed.  
2. "Experience Modes"  
3. Select the desired mode.  
4. "Settings"  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Caring Car  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
Principle  
A poor data connection influences the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
the Search.  
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior  
are harmonized for the driver in a short-term  
program.  
General information  
By selecting a program, the interior lighting,  
climate control and music selection will be ad-  
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
The program can be stopped prematurely:  
"End program"  
Adjusting a program  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
4. "Music settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
56  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Functional requirement  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
software upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Manual search  
1. "CAR"  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
57  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
The available data for Remote Software Up-  
grade is automatically loaded into the vehicle.  
No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Display in the vehicle:  
Via BMW app  
If an upgrade is available, information about  
the new software version is displayed in the  
BMW app.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Info about version"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
The data can then be transmitted from the  
mobile device to the vehicle.  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
Installing the upgrade  
General information  
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to  
the smartphone.  
▷
▷
▷
The installation of the upgrade may result  
in a deletion of software changes, e.g.,  
increases in performance that have been  
made by parties other than the manufac-  
turer of the vehicle.  
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.  
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.  
▷
▷
iOS: Connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Android: connect WLAN.  
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
The data transfer of the upgrade from the  
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the  
background only while driving.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The installation may take approx. 20 mi-  
nutes.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer  
to page 72.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
▷
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Information about the version  
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
General information  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been successfully  
58  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
Prerequisites for the installation  
Starting installation  
▷
The battery is sufficiently charged.  
The upgrade can be installed when all prereq-  
uisites have been met.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1. "CAR"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning  
is not activated via iDrive.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Preparing the vehicle  
▷
Alarm system.  
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Operation of the trunk lid.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent, for  
instance if the installation is terminated.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the convertible top.  
Close the windows.  
Close the trunk.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
After an extended stationary period, charge  
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the BMW  
app.  
59  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
60  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
General settings  
Setting the time format  
1. "CAR"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time format:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic time setting  
Depending on the vehicle's optional features,  
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone  
are updated automatically.  
Time  
Setting the time zone  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Automatic time setting"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time zone:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Date  
Setting the time  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the date  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date:"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours  
are displayed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is  
displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
7. Press the Controller.  
8. Make the settings for the month and year.  
9. "OK"  
8. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-  
nutes are displayed.  
9. "OK"  
61  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
the driver. This system supports various vehi-  
cle assistance systems, e.g.:  
Setting the date format  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
Fatigue alert.  
2. "Settings"  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant with  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date format:"  
Activating/deactivating  
1. "CAR"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Driver Attention Camera"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Language  
Setting the system language  
1. "CAR"  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel rim.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷
When the driver is wearing infrared imper-  
meable sunglasses.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Trip data settings  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
Principle  
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset  
can be configured.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Resetting trip data  
1. "CAR"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Units"  
2. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset trip data"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Principle  
A camera that monitors driver activity is lo-  
cated in the instrument cluster. The camera  
evaluates the head position and eye opening  
and uses the data to analyze the attention of  
62  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Speed warning  
Activating/deactivating pop-  
ups  
Principle  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed  
exceeds the set speed limit again after drop-  
ping below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting  
1. "CAR"  
Control display  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Warning above:"  
Brightness  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed  
is displayed.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Press the Controller.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-  
ness is set.  
2. "Settings"  
8. Press the Controller.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Speed warning"  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Reset vehicle data  
Applying current speed as the  
speed warning  
1. "CAR"  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
stationary.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Select current speed"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
63  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
portant customer information are displayed as  
long as they are relevant.  
When the saved settings in a driver profile  
are synchronized with the ConnectedDrive ac-  
count, these settings will remain in the Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Select desired notifications.  
4.  
Press the button.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Notifications  
Settings  
Principle  
It is possible to set which notifications are per-  
mitted and which notifications will be displayed  
at the start of the trip or upon completion of  
the trip.  
The menu centrally displays all notifications ar-  
riving in the vehicle in form of a list.  
General information  
The following notifications can be displayed:  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic messages.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Check Control messages.  
Messages on service notifications.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Communication messages, for example e-  
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.  
Display, notifications  
▷
▷
Messages, for instance from the BMW app.  
Messages from the manufacturer of the ve-  
hicle, for instance technical information or  
important customer information.  
General information  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants al-  
lows the configuration of the range of mes-  
sages that will be displayed. Depending on  
the situation, the desired condition can be acti-  
vated.  
The number of notifications is additionally dis-  
played in the status field.  
Go to notifications  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Select desired notification.  
Delete notifications  
Notifications can be deleted from the list.  
Sustained Check Control messages or mes-  
sages from the vehicle manufacturer with im-  
64  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Condition  
Description  
"Do not  
disturb"  
Incoming calls and non-criti-  
cal notifications are not dis-  
played.  
Icon is shown in the  
status information with the  
number of messages.  
"Passenger  
on board"  
Private contents such as  
messages will not be dis-  
played directly.  
Icon is shown in the  
status information with the  
number of messages.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Notification display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
65  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options  
Principle  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driver profile settings.  
Data protection  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored programmable memory buttons.  
Data transfer  
Trip computer and on-board computer in-  
formation.  
Principle  
▷
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive ac-  
count.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up  
to 15 minutes.  
Settings  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
Functional requirement  
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Deleting data  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 63.  
66  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
This option is offered in new vehicle for a  
limited period of time.  
Driver profiles  
As soon as the engine is started or any button  
is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.  
Principle  
Driver profiles can be created to store personal  
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multi-  
ple drivers, each driver can create his personal  
driver profile. When a driver profile is selected,  
the vehicle will automatically apply the stored  
settings in the driver profile.  
Setup assistant  
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles  
for a limited period of time on the Welcome  
screen to configure the most important set-  
tings for the vehicle.  
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up as-  
sistant.  
General information  
Three personal driver profiles can be created.  
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive  
at any time.  
In addition, a guest profile is available that can  
be selected by any driver. The guest profile is  
active when a personal driver profile has not  
been selected.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Changes to the vehicle settings are automati-  
cally stored in the active driver profile or in the  
guest profile.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Getting started"  
The driver is guided step by step through the  
following functions:  
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver  
when it is unlocked. For this purpose, the rec-  
ognition via a vehicle key or a digital key must  
be assigned to a driver profile.  
▷
▷
Setting the system language.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
ConnectedDrive countries:The settings stored  
in the driver profile can be synchronized with  
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account.  
It is thereby possible to use these settings in  
other BMW vehicles as well.  
If the set-up assistant was opened in the  
guest profile: create driver profile.  
▷
▷
Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.  
If the set-up assistant was opened from  
an already defined driver profile: set up per-  
sonal assistant.  
Functional requirements  
When a driver profile is created, switched or  
deleted, the vehicle must move at a maximum  
of walking speed.  
▷
Depending on whether the set-up assistant  
was opened from an already defined driver  
profile or a guest profile: set up services  
or confirm the explanation for the transmis-  
sion of vehicle related data.  
Welcome screen  
After the control display is switched on, the  
Welcome screen will be displayed.  
▷
Set up other methods for use.  
The selected settings are stored in the active  
driver profile.  
The following actions can be carried out on the  
Welcome screen:  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated by any  
driver. Vehicle settings that are entered when  
▷
▷
Switch the driver profile.  
Starting the set-up assistant.  
67  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
the guest profile is active will be stored in the  
guest profile.  
ConnectedDrive countries:An existing Con-  
nectedDrive account must be assigned to  
a driver profile. The following options are  
available for this purpose:  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
▷
"Via My BMW App"  
▷
▷
A driver profile has not been created yet.  
Scanning the displayed QR code will ac-  
cept the access data for the Connected-  
Drive account from the BMW app.  
No driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key that was used to unlock the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
"Log in"  
▷
No driver profile has been assigned to the  
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi-  
cle.  
The access data must be entered via  
iDrive.  
The following limitations apply:  
"New registration"  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
Scan the displayed QR code and follow  
the instructions on the smartphone.  
It is not possible to assign the recognition  
to the guest profile.  
5. If the vehicle is in the guest profile:  
"Transfer current settings"  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
The settings of the guest profile are ap-  
plied.  
ConnectedDrive countries:It is not possible  
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac-  
count.  
6. ConnectedDrive countries:  
"Synchronize driver profile"  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
Future changes to the settings are  
synchronized with the BMW Cloud.  
1. "CAR"  
Selecting recognition  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Guest"  
4. "OK"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
Creating a driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"with vehicle key"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
The vehicle key that is recognized in  
the vehicle interior is assigned to the  
driver profile. If multiple vehicle keys are  
detected, the unintended vehicle keys  
must be removed from the vehicle inte-  
rior.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Add driver profile"  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:A name  
must be entered for the driver profile.  
▷
"With Digital Key"  
68  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The digital key that is recognized in the  
vehicle interior is assigned to the driver  
profile. If multiple digital keys are de-  
tected, the unintended digital keys must  
be removed from the vehicle interior.  
If no driver profile is assigned to this key,  
the guest profile is activated.  
Setting up a PIN  
A driver profile with recognition cannot be ac-  
tivated without vehicle key and without digital  
key. In this case, a PIN can be set up to acti-  
vate the driver profile.  
6. "Activate linkage"  
If the vehicle key or the smartphone with the  
digital key is not carried with you or not recog-  
nized, the driver profile can only be selected on  
the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set  
up.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail-  
able:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not  
known, the driver profile cannot be activated.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is availa-  
ble:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not  
known, the driver profile can be activated with  
the access data of the corresponding Connect-  
edDrive account.  
Automatic recognition  
If recognition has been defined, automatic acti-  
vation of the driver profile is triggered by the  
following activities:  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
Digital Key must be carried with you.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned Digital Key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. "using PIN"  
Changing/canceling the recognition  
function  
When another vehicle key or another digital  
key is assigned to a driver profile, the current  
assignment must be canceled first.  
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
driver profile is done according to the following  
priority:  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
activation of the assigned driver profile.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unas-  
signed key, the guest profile is activated.  
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are de-  
tected at the same time, the Digital Key  
triggers the activation of the assigned driver  
profile.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
If another key is detected on the driver’s  
door after activation of the driver profile, the  
driver profile of the last key detected is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
"with vehicle key"  
"With Digital Key"  
6. "Activate linkage"  
69  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be  
handed over such as for maintenance, carry  
out the following steps first:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat and climate control function.  
Exterior lights.  
Vehicle access.  
▷
▷
▷
Setting up PIN.  
Head-up display.  
Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.  
Switching to the guest profile.  
Main menu layout.  
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive  
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre-  
ated or via iDrive:  
The handed over vehicle key can then no lon-  
ger be used to access the personal driver pro-  
file.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
Selecting a driver profile  
Depending on the recognition setting, the  
driver profile will be selected automatically.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile  
will be selected on the Welcome screen or via  
iDrive. A PIN may have to be entered.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Synchronize driver profile"  
6. "Synchronize driver profile"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
Renaming a driver profile  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
1. "CAR"  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "OK"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
All settings stored in the selected driver profile  
are automatically applied.  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "Settings"  
Switching synchronization with the  
ConnectedDrive account on/off  
Some of the settings saved to a driver pro-  
file are synchronized with the personal Con-  
nectedDrive account. This enables the use of  
these personal settings in other BMW vehicles  
with ConnectedDrive access, provided that this  
function is supported.  
5. Enter a profile name.  
6.  
Select the icon.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
The name of the driver profile is transferred  
from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for  
the profile name must be made in the Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
The following settings are synchronized with  
the ConnectedDrive account:  
Selecting a profile picture  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Navigation.  
Data protection.  
Driver profile and driver assistance.  
Language.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
70  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
The use of personal settings that are stored in  
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles  
is subject to technical limitations. For example,  
settings may be stored for a system that is  
not available, or available in a non-compatible  
version, in other vehicles.  
4. "Avatar"  
5. Select the desired profile picture.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
The profile image is transferred from the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.  
Deleting the driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Remove driver profile"  
6. Select the desired driver profile.  
7. "Delete now"  
ConnectedDrive countries:If the driver profile  
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac-  
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive  
account will be retained.  
System limits  
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key  
may not be possible in the following cases,  
e.g.:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned driver profile are  
located in the outer area on the driver's  
side of the vehicle.  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked from the  
BMW app.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
A driver profile can only be created and  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account  
when the vehicle has cellular network recep-  
tion.  
71  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Connections  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle  
Principle  
General information  
Various connection types are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and the desired function.  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and the suitable connection types for  
them. The range of functions depends on the  
mobile device.  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon in the de-  
vice list  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Using phone functions via iDrive or  
touchscreen.  
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or  
SMS.  
Playing music from the smartphone  
or the audio system.  
Bluetooth audio.  
WLAN in the vehicle:  
Wi-Fi.  
Wi-Fi.  
USB.  
Using apps in the vehicle.  
Wi-Fi hotspot:  
Using the vehicle Internet access.  
USB port:  
Playing music or videos from a USB  
device.  
72  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon in the de-  
vice list  
Apple CarPlay:  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice  
operation.  
Android Auto:  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice  
operation.  
The following connection types require one-  
time pairing with the vehicle:  
Displaying the vehicle identification  
number and software part number  
With a search for compatible devices, you may  
have to state the vehicle identification number  
and the software part number. These numbers  
can be displayed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Bluetooth.  
Wi-Fi.  
Paired devices are automatically recognized  
later on and connected to the vehicle.  
1. "COM"  
Safety information  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
5. "Bluetooth® info"  
6. "System information"  
Managing mobile devices  
General information  
▷
After one-time pairing, the devices are  
automatically recognized and reconnected  
when standby state is switched on.  
Compatible devices  
▷
After stored content on the SIM card or the  
mobile phone such as contacts has been  
detected, the data is transmitted to the ve-  
hicle and can be used via iDrive.  
General information  
Information on compatible mobile devices is  
available as follows:  
▷
For some devices, certain settings are nec-  
essary, for instance authorization; see the  
operating instructions of the device.  
▷
▷
▷
On the BMW homepage.  
Via Hotline/Customer Support  
At an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Displaying the device list  
All devices paired with or connected to the ve-  
hicle are displayed in the device list.  
73  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
A maximum of four devices can be connected  
to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, and a maximum  
of ten devices can be connected to the vehicle  
via Wi-Fi.  
The device remains paired and can be  
connected again.  
▷
▷
"Delete device"  
The device is disconnected and re-  
moved from the device list.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
"Connection mode"  
An icon to the right of the device name indi-  
cates, for which function the device is used.  
Select a connection mode, for instance  
Apple CarPlay.  
When the icon is displayed in white, this func-  
tion is actively connected to the vehicle. The  
icon is displayed in gray when the function of  
the device is inactive.  
▷
▷
"Telephone"  
Set telephone.  
"Bluetooth® audio"  
Playback of music files on external de-  
vices such as audio devices or mobile  
phones via Bluetooth®.  
Icon Meaning  
Telephone.  
▷
▷
"Apps"  
Bluetooth audio.  
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Apps.  
With the installed BMW app, apps from  
the smartphone can be displayed in the  
vehicle.  
"Wi-Fi®"  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Connects the device with the WLAN in  
the vehicle.  
Priority of the phones  
Configuring the device  
When multiple mobile phones are connected  
to the vehicle, you can specify the priority of  
the mobile phones. The mobile phone with the  
highest priority is preferred, for instance for  
outgoing calls and messages.  
Functions can be activated or deactivated for  
paired and connected devices.  
The range of functions depends on the mobile  
device.  
Observe the information on the control display.  
1. "COM"  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
3. Select the desired device.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
5. "Priorities for telephones"  
6. Select the desired device.  
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.  
▷
"Connect device"  
The functions that were assigned to  
the device before disconnecting are as-  
signed to the device when it is recon-  
nected. The functions may be deacti-  
vated on a device already connected.  
▷
"Disconnect device"  
74  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Frequently Asked Questions  
Bluetooth connection  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 73.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
▷
The vehicle key or BMW display key is in  
the vehicle.  
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or  
connected?  
▷
▷
The device is ready for operation.  
Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and  
on the device.  
▷
There are too many Bluetooth devices con-  
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.  
▷
▷
The pairing readiness is displayed on the  
control display.  
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections  
with other devices.  
Bluetooth default settings such as for visi-  
bility may be required on device, refer to  
your device operating instructions.  
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the  
device list on the mobile phone and start a  
new device search.  
Too many Bluetooth devices are paired  
with the same function. Adapt the functions  
in the device list on the control display.  
Activate Bluetooth  
1. "COM"  
▷
The mobile phone is in power-save mode  
or has only a limited remaining battery life.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate  
the power-save mode where required.  
5. "Bluetooth®"  
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?  
6. Select setting.  
▷
The applications on the mobile phone do  
not function anymore.  
Connecting the device  
1. "COM"  
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.  
▷
Too high or too low ambient temperature  
for mobile phone operation.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-  
treme ambient temperatures.  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
Why can telephone functions not be used via  
iDrive?  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
▷
Phone functions are not configured for the  
mobile phone.  
6. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-  
phone function.  
Why are no or not all telephone book entries  
displayed or why are they incomplete?  
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.  
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list.  
75  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Transmission of the telephone book entries  
is not yet complete.  
WLAN connection  
It is possible that only the telephone book  
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card  
are transmitted.  
General information  
For certain applications such as apps, the data  
exchange between smartphone and vehicle  
occurs via WLAN.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
It may not be possible to display telephone  
book entries with special characters.  
It may not be possible to transmit contacts  
from social networks.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
The number of phone book entries to be  
transmitted is too high.  
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-  
terface.  
Data volume of the contact too large, for  
instance due to stored information such as  
memos.  
Activate WLAN in the vehicle  
1. "COM"  
Reduce the data volume of the contact.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
▷
▷
The mobile phone has only been connected  
as an audio source.  
Configure the mobile phone and connect it  
with the telephone function.  
5. "Wi-Fi®"  
Contact was created in the contact list of  
the phone after the last synchronization.  
Wi-Fi hotspot  
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload  
contacts"  
Principle  
How can the telephone connection quality be  
improved?  
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can  
use the Internet connection of the vehicle via  
the Wi-Fi hotspot.  
▷
Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal  
on the mobile phone, depending on the  
mobile phone.  
General information  
Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-  
Fi hotspot simultaneously.  
▷
▷
Insert the mobile phone into the wireless  
charging tray.  
Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa-  
rately in the sound settings.  
Functional requirements  
If all points listed have been checked and the  
required function is still not available: contact  
the hotline, an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-  
terface.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 73.  
WLAN is activated on the vehicle.  
Internet use is activated for the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
Registration and data contract with a serv-  
ice provider where required.  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
76  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Connecting a device to the Internet  
via the Wi-Fi hotspot  
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi-  
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a  
data volume purchase from a service provider.  
Deactivating Internet usage via the  
Wi-Fi hotspot  
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data  
volume is used up, for instance.  
1. "COM"  
Depending on the national-market version,  
data volume can be purchased via the con-  
nected mobile communication device or from  
the ConnectedDrive Store.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Wi-Fi hotspot"  
1. "COM"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Apple CarPlay©  
5. "Internet, apps"  
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis-  
played on the control display.  
Principle  
CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible  
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control  
and iDrive.  
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces-  
sary.  
"Open settings"  
Functional requirements  
7. Activate Internet usage.  
"Wi-Fi hotspot"  
▷
Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with  
iOS 9.3 or later.  
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 73.  
Corresponding mobile contract.  
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile  
device. Select network name on the device.  
▷
▷
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are  
activated on the iPhone.  
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con-  
nect.  
▷
▷
If necessary, the setting for mobile data  
must be activated on the iPhone.  
The device is displayed in the device list.  
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on  
the control display. Alternatively, this QR code  
can be used to pair the mobile device with the  
hotspot.  
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-  
hicle.  
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay  
1. "COM"  
All devices connected via the hotspot use this  
data volume.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
77  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby  
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.  
Android Auto©  
A control number is displayed.  
Principle  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
Android Auto allows select functions of a com-  
patible smartphone to be operated via Goo-  
gle Assistant voice control and via iDrive.  
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"  
General information  
The range of services offered depends on the  
country.  
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and  
displayed in the device list.  
Operation  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung  
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or  
an Android smartphone with Android 11, re-  
gardless of the manufacturer.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
▷
▷
▷
Compatible devices, refer to page 73.  
Corresponding mobile contract.  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the  
smartphone.  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone must support a Wi-Fi con-  
nection with 5 GHz.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
If necessary, the setting for mobile data  
must be activated on the smartphone.  
The iPhone has already been paired with  
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set  
up, CarPlay can no longer be selected.  
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
Delete the iPhone concerned from the de-  
vice list.  
Pairing a smartphone with Android  
Auto  
1. "COM"  
▷
On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-  
cerned from the list of stored connections  
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
▷
Pair the iPhone as a new device.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
If the steps listed have been carried out and  
the required function is still not available: con-  
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby  
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.  
A control number is displayed.  
78  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
▷
Mobile phones.  
▷
▷
Audio devices such as MP3 players.  
USB storage devices.  
Common file systems are supported. FAT32  
and exFAT are the recommended formats.  
8. "Use Android Auto"  
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile  
device.  
A connected USB device will be supplied with  
charge current via the USB port if the device  
supports this. Follow the maximum charge  
current of the USB port.  
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list.  
The following uses are possible on USB ports  
with data transfer:  
Operation  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.  
▷
▷
Playing music files.  
Playing videos.  
Follow the following when connecting:  
Frequently Asked Questions  
▷
Do not use force when plugging the con-  
nector into the USB port.  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
▷
▷
Use a flexible adapter cable.  
Protect the USB device against mechanical  
damage.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Due to the large number of USB devices  
available on the market, it cannot be guar-  
anteed that every device is operable on the  
vehicle.  
The smartphone has already been paired with  
Android Auto. When a new connection is set  
up, Android Auto can no longer be selected.  
Do not expose USB devices to extreme en-  
vironmental conditions such as very high  
temperatures, refer to the operating in-  
structions of the device.  
▷
Delete the smartphone concerned from the  
device list.  
▷
On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con-  
cerned from the list of stored connections  
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
Due to the many different compression  
techniques, proper playback of the media  
stored on the USB device cannot be guar-  
anteed in all cases.  
▷
Pair the smartphone as a new device.  
If the steps listed have been carried out and  
the required function is still not available: con-  
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
To ensure proper transmission of the  
stored data, do not charge a USB device  
via the onboard socket, when it is con-  
nected to the USB port.  
Depending on how the USB device is be-  
ing used, settings may be required on the  
USB storage device, refer to the operating  
instructions of the device.  
USB connection  
General information  
The following mobile devices can be con-  
nected to the USB port:  
Not compatible USB devices:  
79  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
USB hard drives.  
USB hubs.  
USB memory card readers with multiple  
slots.  
▷
▷
HFS-formatted USB devices.  
Devices such as fans or bulbs.  
Functional requirement  
Compatible device with USB port.  
Additional information:  
Compatible devices, refer to page 73.  
Connecting the device  
Connect the USB device using a suitable  
adapter cable to a USB port.  
The USB device is displayed in the device list.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 295.  
80  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the  
scope of delivery includes two vehicle keys or  
one vehicle key and the BMW display key.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
A driver profile with personal settings can be  
assigned to a vehicle key.  
Warning  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
81  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
▷
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-  
locked when the button is pressed for the  
first time.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 179.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings, press the  
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the  
other vehicle access points.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
Overview  
▷
If a driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key, this driver profile will be acti-  
vated and the settings that are saved in it  
will be applied.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the vehicle interior, they will not  
be folded out during unlocking.  
1
Unlocking  
2
Locking  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched off.  
Pre-conditioning 286  
Opening the trunk lid  
Panic mode, pathway lighting  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
3
4
Unlocking  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking  
using the vehicle key depends on the following  
settings:  
82  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Convenient opening  
Safety information  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
The following functions are executed:  
Warning  
▷
▷
All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
Body parts can be jammed when opening  
and closing the convertible top. There is a  
risk of injury. When opening and closing the  
convertible top, observe the movement and  
keep the travel path clear.  
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched on.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must  
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop  
button.  
Opening  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key.  
With Comfort Access: convenient  
closing  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
With Comfort Access:  
Safety information  
In close range to the vehicle, the convertible  
top is also opened.  
Warning  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key until the convertible top is fully  
opened and the convertible top well  
With convenient closing, body parts can be  
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is  
clear during convenient closing.  
storage cover is fully closed. Leaving the close  
range of the vehicle stops the motion.  
Closing  
Locking  
Press and hold the button on the vehicle  
key after locking.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking us-  
ing the vehicle key depends on the following  
settings:  
The windows and the convertible top are  
closed in close range to the vehicle, as long  
as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.  
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key until the convertible top is fully  
closed and the convertible top well stor-  
age cover is fully closed. Leaving the close  
range of the vehicle stops the motion.  
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The  
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
The exterior mirrors are folded in.  
The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
83  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Switching on the interior and  
exterior lighting  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Press the button on the vehicle key with  
the vehicle locked.  
The function is not available for the first 10 sec-  
onds after locking.  
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Opening  
Interior lights, refer to page 183.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
▷
Depending on the settings, parts of the ex-  
terior lighting will be switched on.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Trunk lid  
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path-  
way lighting feature.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Additional information:  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 179.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
country version, it is possible to specify  
whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the  
vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will re-  
spond to this.  
Replacing the battery  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the trunk lid with the vehicle key.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Always replace the  
discharged battery with a battery with the  
same voltage, the same size and the same  
specification.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Integrated key, refer to page 96.  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the  
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and  
84  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
lift the lid with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver  
profile, the connection to this vehicle key must  
be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be as-  
signed to the driver profile.  
Malfunction  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a  
pointed object and lift it out.  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3 V battery with the  
positive side facing up.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
5. Press the lid closed.  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key  
until the integrated key engages.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key.  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 96.  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
85  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Switching the drive-ready state on via  
emergency detection of the vehicle key  
BMW display key  
General information  
The scope of delivery of the BMW display key  
includes an additional mechanical key. If the  
display key is used, the mechanical key should  
be carried with you, for instance in the wallet.  
The mechanical key is used like the integrated  
key.  
The display key supports all functions of the  
standard vehicle key.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
In addition, the following functions are also  
available:  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Display status of doors and windows.  
Display status of the alarm system.  
Display service information.  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
Call up range with available fuel.  
With pre-heating: operate pre-heating.  
2. If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
Without pre-heating: operate pre-ventila-  
tion.  
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly  
change the position of the vehicle key and re-  
peat the procedure.  
▷
Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine  
Start  
Additional information:  
Frequently Asked Questions  
Integrated key, refer to page 96.  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
Safety information  
▷
The options provided by the Remote Serv-  
ices of the BMW app include the ability to  
lock and unlock a vehicle.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract and the BMW app must be  
installed on a smartphone.  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
86  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
Overview  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
1
Opening the trunk lid  
Unlocking  
2
3
Press and hold or press three times in quick  
succession: panic mode  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Press briefly: pathway lighting  
Locking  
Releasing the parking brake.  
4
5
6
7
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Display  
Back  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Turn the display on/off  
Micro-USB charging interface  
8
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Reception range  
The number of available display key functions  
depends on the distance from the vehicle.  
▷
When you are in close proximity to the ve-  
hicle, all functions of the display key are  
available.  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
▷
The status information can be called up in  
the extended reception range.  
With pre-heating: the pre-heating can be  
operated.  
Without pre-heating: the pre-ventilation can  
be operated.  
▷
Outside of the reception range of the ve-  
hicle, you can display the last transmitted  
status information from the vehicle.  
The icon is shown on the display if one of  
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception  
range.  
87  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Hiding the display on the display manually:  
press the button on the left side of the display  
key.  
Display  
General information  
The display is divided into the upper status  
line, the information area, and the lower status  
line.  
To show the display:  
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis-  
play key.  
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to  
top to unlock the screen lock.  
Upper status line  
The upper status line displays the following  
information:  
To turn off the display to increase the usable  
battery life:  
▷
/
Vehicle secured/vehicle unse-  
1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.  
cured.  
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of  
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.  
▷
▷
Set time in the vehicle.  
Charge state of the display key battery.  
3. "OK"  
To turn the display on:  
Information area  
Press the button on the left side of the display  
key.  
The information area can be used to access  
information and perform additional functions.  
If the information area contains more than one  
page, then page indicators are shown beneath  
the information.  
Operating concept  
The following information shows how to ac-  
cess the information and functions using the  
main menus.  
A solid indicator denotes the current  
page.  
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to  
change between the pages.  
Main menu  
Information/Function  
"Security  
information"  
/
If further information is available on a page,  
tap the appropriate icon.  
Door status.  
Alarm system status.  
To return to the original page:  
icon beneath the display.  
tap on the  
After alarm activation:  
date, time, and reason  
for the alarm activation.  
Lower status line  
The lower status line indicates whether or not  
the display key is within reception range.  
Window status.  
▷
"Connected": the display key is within re-  
ception range.  
"Vehicle  
information"  
Service interval indicators  
of Condition Based Serv-  
ice.  
▷
"Updated": the display key is not within re-  
ception range. It indicates when the last  
data transfer from the vehicle took place.  
Status of the roadside  
parking lights.  
Turning on/off  
The display will go out automatically after a  
short time to conserve battery power.  
88  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
and in isolated cases the charging process  
may be interrupted temporarily.  
Main menu  
Information/Function  
"Mobility info"  
Range with available fuel.  
▷
When inserting the display key into the  
wireless charging tray, make sure there  
are no objects between it and the wireless  
charging tray.  
"Preconditioning With pre-heating: operate  
setting"  
pre-heating.  
Without pre-heating: op-  
erate pre-ventilation.  
Safety information  
Stationary climate control  
through Remote Engine  
Start.  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. When charg-  
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no  
objects on the tray together with the device.  
Display key battery  
General information  
Follow the following information:  
▷
If the charge state of the display key battery  
declines, the display is switched off auto-  
matically. The battery must be recharged  
so that the display can be switched back  
on. The operability of the standard buttons  
is retained until the battery is completely  
discharged.  
Charging  
▷
▷
▷
Charge the battery for at least three hours  
before using the display key for the first  
time or if the key has not been used for an  
extended period.  
Via USB  
Connect the display key via the micro-USB  
charging interface to a USB port.  
The Display Key can be used during charg-  
ing via the USB port.If the battery is com-  
pletely discharged, it may take some time  
before the Display Key can be used again.  
In the center console  
Due to the large number of USB charg-  
ers available on the market, it cannot be  
guaranteed that every charger will function  
properly. The charging time depends on the  
charger used.  
▷
Charging via the USB port may heat up the  
charger and the display key.  
Charging in the wireless charging tray may  
heat up the tray and the display key.  
1. Open the tray cover.  
2. Place the display key into the middle of the  
wireless charging tray in front of the cup  
holders.  
At higher temperatures, the charge current  
through the display key may be reduced,  
89  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the mechanical key.  
LED displays  
Turning on drive-ready state via  
emergency detection of the BMW  
display key  
Color Meaning  
Blue  
The display key is charging.  
The blue LED stays illuminated once  
the inserted display key is fully  
charged.  
Or-  
The display key is not charging.  
ange  
Temperature on the display key  
possibly too high or foreign object in  
charging tray.  
Red  
The display key is not charging.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the display key has not been detected.  
Contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
1. Hold the display key with its rear against  
the mark on the steering column. Pay at-  
tention to the display in the instrument  
cluster.  
Malfunction  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
2. If the display key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may  
malfunction under the following circumstances:  
If the display key is not detected, slightly  
change the position of the display key and re-  
peat the procedure.  
▷
The battery of the display key is dis-  
charged.  
▷
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Resetting the BMW display key  
If the charged display key cannot be turned on  
anymore or if the display does not respond to  
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the display key due to metal  
objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity.  
Press and hold the following buttons on the  
display key at the same time for at least  
10 seconds until the display is switched off and  
then on again:  
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
▷
Do not transport the display key together with  
metal objects or electronic devices.  
▷
90  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Key Card  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
General information  
The availability of the Key Card depends on  
the equipment and the country.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and  
the Key Card uses near field communication,  
NFC.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
91  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
Activating Key Card  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play to activate the Key Card.  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Deactivating Key Card  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. Select Key Card.  
6. "Key Card active"  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-  
gine.  
With wireless charging tray:After starting the  
engine, take the Key Card out of the tray to  
92  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
make tray available for charging compatible  
smartphones.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Malfunction  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
BMW Digital Key  
Warning  
Principle  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-  
locked and locked, as well as started, with a  
compatible smartphone.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
General information  
The availability of the BMW Digital Key de-  
pends on the equipment and national-market  
version.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices such as a Smartwatch.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app  
provides a check to determine if the smart-  
phone and the vehicle are compatible.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
A driver profile with individual settings can be  
assigned to a digital key.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Additional information:  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 67.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al-  
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key  
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-  
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-  
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key  
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to  
be handed over to another person. You can  
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card  
instead of your smartphone. Always take the  
vehicle key with you to a service appointment.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
93  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
NOTICE  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and  
the smartphone uses near field communica-  
tion, NFC.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
Deleting a shared key  
General information  
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-  
phone with the main digital key, via the smart-  
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
The proof of authorization can be started via  
the BMW app or the activation code in the  
corresponding smartphone function, e.g., the  
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located  
in the vehicle to be enabled.  
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared  
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu  
in the BMW app or on the control display.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Sharing digital keys  
Deletion via iDrive  
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an  
authorized vehicle key must be located in the  
General information  
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
94  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
vehicle or the main key must be located in the  
smartphone tray.  
The position of the near field communication  
antenna depends on the smartphone model.  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors including the trunk lid  
are closed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. "Delete key"  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-  
gine.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Sale of the smartphone  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. "Reset function"  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle.  
95  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-  
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off  
with a digital key.  
NOTICE  
The door lock is permanently joined with the  
door. The door handle can be moved. When  
pulling the door handle with the integrated  
key inserted, paint or the integrated key can  
be damaged. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Remove the integrated key before  
pulling the external door handle.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 107.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Removing  
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
▷
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
Integrated key  
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
General information  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
without the vehicle key using the integrated  
key.  
Locking/unlocking via the door lock  
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with  
one hand.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key also fits in the glove compart-  
ment.  
Safety information  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from  
the back under the cover cap and push the  
cover cap out.  
96  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-  
vent the cover cap from falling out of the  
door handle.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
General information  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights come on.  
Overview  
3. Remove the cover cap.  
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the  
integrated key.  
Buttons for the central locking system.  
Locking  
Press the button with the front doors  
closed.  
The other doors must be unlocked or locked  
from the inside.  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
Unlocking  
Press the button.  
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key  
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be  
activated.  
Opening  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Pull the door opener above the armrest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
97  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Comfort Access  
Principle  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket, is sufficient.  
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle  
key when it is in close proximity or in the inte-  
rior.  
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
General information  
Comfort Access supports the following func-  
tions:  
▷
If a driver profile was assigned to the vehi-  
cle key, this driver profile will be activated  
and the settings that are stored in it will be  
applied.  
▷
▷
▷
Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the  
door handle.  
Touchless unlocking and locking of the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the  
BMW Digital Key.  
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the interior, they will not be folded  
out when unlocking.  
▷
▷
Opening trunk lid.  
Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-  
touch activation.  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched off.  
Functional requirements  
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
Locking  
▷
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not  
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via  
the Comfort Access depends on the following  
settings:  
Unlocking  
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking  
via the Comfort Access depends on the follow-  
ing settings:  
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The  
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
98  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle  
Close the driver's door.  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Opening  
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a  
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.  
1 second without grasping the door handle.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched on.  
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk  
lid.  
Opening the trunk lid  
Opening and closing the trunk lid  
with no-touch activation  
General information  
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,  
locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Principle  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
The trunk lid can be opened and closed with  
no-touch activation using the vehicle key you  
are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-di-  
rected foot movement in the central rear area  
and the trunk lid is opened or closed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the  
trunk lid may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
If contactless opening of the trunk lid is acti-  
vated, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
99  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Performing the foot movement  
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at  
approx. one arm's length away from the  
rear end.  
Warning  
With hands-free opening of the trunk, there  
may be unintentional contact with vehicle  
parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is a  
risk of injury. When moving your foot, make  
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch  
the vehicle.  
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving  
direction and immediately pull it back. With  
this movement, the leg must pass through  
the ranges of both sensors.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Opening  
Warning  
Perform the foot movement described earlier.  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning  
system flashes.  
Closing  
Perform the foot movement described earlier.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position P must be engaged for  
touchless opening of the trunk lid.  
Moving your foot again will stop the closing  
motion, and moving it one more time after that  
will re-open the trunk lid.  
Contactless opening and closing of the trunk  
lid must be activated in the settings.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
Settings  
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate  
can be switched on or off.  
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Movement in the range of the sensors may  
cause unintended opening or closing of the  
cargo area, for instance due to water running  
down when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy  
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening  
or closing of the cargo area in such cases,  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Tailgate"  
100  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance  
from the rear of the vehicle.  
unlocked when the driver approaches the  
vehicle on the driver's side.  
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be  
unlocked regardless of the side on which  
the driver approaches the vehicle.  
Touchless unlocking and locking of  
the vehicle  
▷
If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle  
is confirmed with a light signal or a sound  
signal.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
▷
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded out and in when the vehicle is un-  
locked and locked.  
General information  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
Functional requirements  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the door handles.  
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking  
zone, the doors and trunk lid must be  
closed.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the door handles.  
▷
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no  
second vehicle key may be within a radius  
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.  
▷
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
If a passenger is detected in the front pass-  
enger seat and the front passenger seat belt  
is engaged when the vehicle is locked, the fol-  
lowing restrictions apply:  
Malfunction  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless  
unlocking/locking depends on the following  
settings:  
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
For replacing the battery, refer to page 84.  
▷
▷
▷
If the automatic unlocking is active.  
If the automatic locking is active.  
▷
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-  
locked.  
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the  
driver's door and fuel filler flap will only be  
101  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Safety information  
▷
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 96.  
Trunk lid  
Opening and Closing  
Opening  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
From the outside  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, it is possible to specify whether  
the trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle  
key and how the vehicle doors will function.  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the trunk lid with the vehicle key.  
It may not be possible to open the trunk lid  
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
The trunk lid can normally not be opened if the  
convertible top is not fully opened or closed. If  
the trunk lid can be opened, make sure it does  
not collide with the convertible top well storage  
cover.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the outer side of the trunk lid.  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the outer  
side of the trunk lid.  
Additional information:  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 104.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
102  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the setting, the doors may  
also be unlocked.  
The vehicle key must be located inside the ve-  
hicle for this function.  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid  
is closed.  
From the inside  
Press the button in the storage compart-  
ment of the driver's door.  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Interruption of the opening procedure  
▷
▷
When starting the engine.  
The opening procedure is interrupted:  
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
▷
▷
▷
When starting the engine.  
When the vehicle starts moving.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the outer side of  
the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the  
trunk lid.  
By pressing the button on the outer side  
of the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the  
trunk lid.  
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk  
lid.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing again continues the opening pro-  
cedure.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
Malfunction  
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-  
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow  
and smooth motion.  
Closing  
From the outside  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
▷
Press the button on the inside of  
the trunk lid.  
With Comfort Access:  
▷
Press the button on the inside of  
the trunk lid.  
The vehicle will be locked after closing the  
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed  
for this purpose and the vehicle key must  
be outside of the vehicle in the area of the  
trunk lid.  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk lid unlocks.  
From the inside  
Pull and hold the button in the storage  
compartment of the driver's door.  
103  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Soft-close automatic  
function  
▷
▷
▷
At least one driver profile has been created.  
A driver profile or the guest profile is active.  
At least one driver profile has an assigned  
ConnectedDrive account.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Accessing the menu for the valet  
parking mode  
Body parts can be jammed while operating  
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Via the switch-off screen  
After switching off drive-ready state the  
switch-off screen will be displayed. Select the  
entry for the valet parking mode on the switch-  
off screen.  
Closing  
To close the doors, push lightly.  
The closing happens automatically.  
Via the display bar at the upper edge  
of the control display  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
Valet parking mode  
2. "Valet parking mode"  
Principle  
Via the vehicle settings  
1. "CAR"  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer  
possible.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
Activating the valet parking mode  
General information  
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible  
to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal  
profiles cannot be changed. Personal data  
cannot be displayed.  
General information  
Before activating the valet parking mode, a  
PIN must be set up to be able to deactivate  
the valet parking mode at a future time.  
Additionally, the following actions are carried  
out:  
The procedure for the PIN input varies de-  
pending on the active driver profile.  
▷
▷
The volume of the audio system is limited.  
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
Driver profile with PIN  
A PIN has been stored for the active driver  
profile.  
▷
▷
The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be  
turned off.  
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.  
Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can  
be locked and disconnected from the cen-  
tral locking system.  
1. "Lock tailgate as well"  
104  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
Driver profile with PIN  
Regardless of which driver activated the valet  
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet  
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.  
2. "Activate now"  
Driver profile without PIN  
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.  
1. "PIN"  
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode  
must be deactivated by entering the assigned  
ConnectedDrive access data.  
2. Enter PIN.  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
Driver profile without PIN  
The valet parking mode was activated by an-  
other person. To deactivate the valet parking  
mode, a driver without a PIN has to enter the  
access data for his ConnectedDrive account.  
4. "Activate linkage"  
5. "Activate now"  
Guest profile  
The guest profile is the active driver profile.  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as-  
signed to the driver profile.  
A PIN must be entered.  
1. "PIN"  
Guest profile  
2. Enter PIN.  
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can  
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode  
was activated in the guest profile.  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
1. Select guest profile.  
4. "Activate now"  
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during ac-  
tivation.  
This PIN can be used once to deactivate  
the valet parking mode for the active guest  
profile.  
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet park-  
ing mode must be deactivated via a personal  
driver profile.  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
General information  
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is  
displayed on the control display.  
Settings  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de-  
pends on which driver profile is selected on the  
lock screen.  
These settings are stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
105  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
Unlocking and locking  
4. "Unlock at end of trip"  
Doors  
1. "CAR"  
After drive-ready state is switched off by  
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked  
vehicle is automatically unlocked.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Key button settings"  
Automatic locking  
1. "CAR"  
4. Select the icon.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
2. "Settings"  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. Select the desired setting:  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
▷
"Lock in a few minutes"  
The vehicle locks automatically after a  
short period of time if no door is opened  
after unlocking.  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
"Lock after starting to drive"  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1. "CAR"  
The vehicle locks automatically after you  
drive off.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
Trunk lid  
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma-  
tion signals:  
Trunk lid and doors  
You can set up if only the trunk lid will be  
unlocked or if the doors will also be unlocked  
when the trunk lid is unlocked  
▷
"Flash when locking/unlocking"  
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,  
locking by flashing once.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
country version, this setting may not be of-  
fered.  
▷
With alarm system:  
"Sound when locking/unlocking"  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Key button settings"  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1. "CAR"  
4.  
Select the icon.  
The text next to the icon indicates the cur-  
rent setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened.  
Automatic unlocking  
1. "CAR"  
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
2. "Settings"  
106  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
▷
▷
▷
Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.  
Movements in the interior.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate opens only when vehicle is  
unlocked."  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the trunk lid can be used with the vehicle  
key.  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
"Lock tailgate button"  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
The operation of the trunk lid via the  
vehicle key is disabled.  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
Comfort Access  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
Touchless locking and unlocking  
Contactless locking and unlocking can be  
switched on or off.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Comfort access"  
Turning on/off  
The alarm system is turned on or off as soon  
as the vehicle is locked or unlocked with the  
vehicle key or via Comfort Access.  
Establishing idle state after opening  
the front doors  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Idle state, refer to page 39.  
Alarm system  
Opening the trunk lid with the alarm  
system switched on  
The trunk lid can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked  
and monitored again provided the doors are  
locked. The hazard warning system flashes  
once.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
107  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key  
three times in succession.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
The alarm system responds when movement  
is detected in the vehicle interior.  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
The car's interior is monitored to the height  
of the seat surfaces. The alarm system is  
switched on together with the interior motion  
sensor even when the convertible top is open.  
Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the  
alarm unintentionally.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec-  
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec-  
onds:  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle  
is locked.  
An alarm has been deployed.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
108  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Overview  
Ending the alarm  
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.  
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key  
and activate the drive-ready state via emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key.  
Malfunction, refer to page 85.  
Power windows for individual win-  
dows  
▷
With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve-  
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front  
passenger door handle completely.  
Power windows for all windows  
Power windows  
Functional requirements  
The windows can be operated under the fol-  
lowing conditions.  
General information  
The windows can be opened with the vehicle  
key from the outside as well as closed with  
Comfort Access.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in-  
stance when the same parking garage is fre-  
quently used.  
Open individually  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
Additional information:  
The window opens while the switch is be-  
ing held.  
▷
▷
Vehicle key, refer to page 81.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 51.  
The window opens automatically. Pressing  
the switch again stops the motion.  
Safety information  
Opening together  
Warning  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
All windows open while the switch is being  
held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
All windows open automatically.  
109  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Safety information  
Close individually  
Warning  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
The window closes while the switch is be-  
ing held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
The window closes automatically if the  
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo-  
tion.  
Closing together  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
1.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
All windows are closed while the switch is  
being pulled.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
All windows close automatically.  
2.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
Pulling the switch again stops the motion.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
Convertible top  
General information  
Follow the following information:  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
▷
Close the convertible top when the vehi-  
cle is parked. A closed convertible top pro-  
tects it from weather-related damage and  
to some extent from theft.  
▷
▷
Even when the convertible top is closed,  
only store valuables in the locked cargo  
area.  
At higher speeds, a vacuum produced in  
the vehicle interior causes the convertible  
top to begin to flutter. Increase the air flow  
110  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
via the ventilation to prevent a vacuum in  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
▷
It is not possible to start the engine and  
operate the convertible top simultaneously.  
When the engine is started using the Start/  
Stop button or using the Auto Start/Stop  
function, the convertible top movement is  
briefly interrupted.  
The convertible top is not suitable for the  
installation of roof carrier systems. The roof  
carrier could come loose. There is a risk of  
accident. Do not mount any roof carrier sys-  
tems to the convertible top.  
▷
▷
Opening a door interrupts closure of the  
convertible top.  
Warning  
In order to protect the battery, move the  
convertible top only when the engine is run-  
ning.  
A convertible top that is not completely open  
or closed is not locked and can open by itself  
while driving due to the air stream. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the convertible top is always  
completely open or closed.  
▷
Before closing the convertible top, remove  
any foreign objects from the windshield  
frame; otherwise, closing may be pre-  
vented.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If there is a longer interruption of the  
convertible top movement with the drive-  
ready state switched on, convertible top and  
convertible top well storage cover remain in  
the current position for several minutes be-  
fore they lower slowly. Lowering may need to  
be carried out in several stages. The stages  
are not maintained permanently. If the drive-  
ready state is switched off, convertible top  
and convertible top well storage cover lower  
already after a short period of time.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when opening  
and closing the convertible top. There is a  
risk of injury. When opening and closing the  
convertible top, observe the movement and  
keep the travel path clear.  
Warning  
When operating the convertible top while  
driving, the view to the rear may be lim-  
ited. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h the  
convertible top stops in its current position.  
There may be a risk of accidents and risk  
of damage to property. When operating the  
convertible top while driving, observe traffic  
attentively and, if necessary, reduce speed.  
Do not operate while reversing or in windy  
weather.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the convertible  
top is completely open or closed. Keep the  
movement area of the convertible top unob-  
structed.  
NOTICE  
Incorrect operation can damage the  
convertible top and other parts of the vehicle.  
There is a risk of damage to property. During  
operation, heed the following points:  
111  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Keep the area of movement of the  
convertible top clear because the  
convertible top swivels out and upward.  
Maximum area of movement: 98.5 in-  
ches/2.5 meters.  
▷
▷
The maximum speed is 30 mph/50 km/h.  
The standby state is switched on and the  
brake pedal is depressed or the drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
▷
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
Keep the area of movement of the  
convertible top well storage cover open  
because the convertible top well storage  
cover will pivot out to the rear. Maximum  
area of movement: 19.7 inches/0.5 me-  
ters.  
The voltage of the vehicle electrical system  
is sufficient.  
▷
▷
The convertible top drive is not overheating.  
The windows can be opened and closed  
automatically.  
▷
▷
Fully close the trunk lid.  
▷
▷
The trunk lid is closed.  
Do not leave the convertible top open for  
more than a day while it is wet.  
The cargo cover is folded down.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Do not open the convertible top, if it is  
wet, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.  
If one of these prerequisites is not met, a check  
control message is displayed.  
Do not place objects on the convertible  
top.  
Operating from the inside  
The rollover protection system may not  
be triggered.  
Opening  
Do not operate the convertible top on  
uneven sections of road.  
Push the switch and hold it.  
Always open or close the convertible top  
completely. The convertible top is only  
locked in its end positions.  
The windows roll down and the convertible top  
opens while the switch is being pushed.  
Closing  
Pull the switch and hold it.  
Overview  
The windows are lowered, the convertible top  
is closed, and the windows are raised again  
while the switch is being pulled.  
Preventing an interruption  
Push or pull the switch until the convertible  
top is completely open or closed and the  
end of the procedure is indicated by a Check  
Control message. Always make sure that the  
convertible top well storage cover is com-  
pletely closed. Only if the convertible top is  
completely open or closed will the convertible  
top and convertible top well storage cover be  
locked.  
Convertible top switch  
Functional requirements  
The following prerequisites must be met in or-  
der to be able to move the convertible top.  
112  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The convertible top movement is interrupted  
if the switch is released. The sequence can  
Safety information  
be continued in the desired direction using the  
switch.  
Warning  
In case of an electrical malfunction, the  
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully  
open position. The convertible top will rise up  
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of  
accident. Do not open the closed convertible  
top manually.  
The convertible top and the convertible top  
well storage cover are not locked in this case.  
Operate switch again until the convertible op-  
eration is terminated.  
Operation from the outside  
When equipped with Comfort Access the  
convertible top can also be operated from out-  
side.  
Warning  
While manually lowering the convertible top,  
body parts can be jammed. With one-sided  
operation, the convertible top can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the convertible top and the  
convertible top well storage cover is free.  
Only close the convertible top manually with  
two people.  
Convenient opening and convenient closing via  
the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle key, refer to page 81.  
Cargo area partition  
Before closing  
1. Lower the side windows completely.  
2. Switching off, standby state.  
Start/Stop button, refer to page 137.  
3. Opening trunk lid.  
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so  
that the convertible top can be opened.  
4. Take convertible top tools out of the cargo  
area.  
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in  
order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when  
the convertible top is closed.  
Manually closing the convertible top  
General information  
If there is a fault, the convertible top can be  
manually closed. Two persons are necessary  
to do this.  
5. Remove the screwdriver from the onboard  
vehicle tool kit.  
If possible, have the convertible top closed  
manually by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
113  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
6. Unlock convertible top well storage cover.  
This requires pulling both emergency un-  
locking Bowden cables out to the stop in  
succession.  
swivel up and to the rear to the end posi-  
tion.  
2. On both sides of the vehicle, grasp the front  
corner of the convertible top frame with one  
hand. With the other hand, grasp the end of  
the convertible top on the lower edge.  
7. When the convertible top well storage cover  
is unlocked, the trunk lid can no longer  
be opened. Remove urgently needed items  
from the cargo area before closing the trunk  
lid.  
8.  
NOTICE  
The trunk lid collides with the unlocked  
convertible top well storage cover during  
closing. There is a risk of damage to prop-  
erty. When closing the trunk lid, make sure  
that the trunk lid does not collide with the  
convertible top well storage cover.  
3. Lift out the convertible top and the  
convertible top ends on both sides simul-  
taneously and swing it forward. When you  
do this, make sure that the convertible top  
ends do not push against other parts.  
Close the trunk lid. At the same time, press  
the convertible top well storage cover at the  
rear edges on the left and right down until  
contact with the trunk lid can be avoided.  
Lifting out convertible top  
1. Grab both sides of the convertible top well  
storage cover on the side in the rear and  
4. Place the convertible top onto the wind-  
shield frame and close the convertible  
top well storage cover. The end of the  
114  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
convertible top must be folded up for this  
purpose.  
the front convertible top frame is locked  
with the front windshield frame.  
5. Fold the end of the convertible top down  
onto the convertible top well storage cover.  
NOTICE  
When driving in the rain or on a wet road  
surface with the convertible top locked only  
in the front, water will penetrate the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of damage to property.  
Do not drive in the rain or on a wet road  
surface with the convertible top locked only in  
the front.  
NOTICE  
Locking the convertible top in the front  
Driving faster than 50 mph/80 km/h with the  
convertible locked only in the front may dam-  
age the convertible top. There is a risk of  
damage to property. When driving with the  
convertible top locked only in the front, do not  
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.  
1. Carefully remove the cover in the center of  
the front convertible top frame.  
Have the convertible top checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Wind deflector  
2. Insert the convertible top tool into the  
convertible top locking.  
Principle  
While a person presses the front convertible  
top frame from the outside onto the mid-  
dle of the windshield frame: turn the  
The wind deflector reduces the air movement  
in the vehicle interior when driving with the  
convertible top down.  
convertible top tool counter-clockwise until  
The wind deflector is most effective when the  
side windows are closed.  
115  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
General information  
A protective sleeve for the removed wind de-  
flector is located in the cargo area.  
Warning  
Operating the wind deflector while driving  
can distract from the surrounding traffic.  
There is a risk of accident. Operate the wind  
deflector only when the vehicle is stationary.  
Make sure the wind deflector is dry before  
stowing it in the protective sleeve.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Warning  
When moving the front seats back, the wind  
deflector can be damaged. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path is clear prior to moving the front  
seats back.  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the wind deflector. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement around  
the wind deflector is clear when installing and  
removing it and folding it up.  
Installing  
The wind deflector is located in a protective  
sleeve in the cargo area.  
Warning  
Objects placed on the installed wind deflector  
can be thrown into the car's interior or en-  
danger other road users, for instance in case  
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver.  
The objects can damage the wind deflector.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not place any objects on the  
installed wind deflector.  
1. Take the wind deflector out of the protec-  
tive sleeve.  
2. Fully unfold the wind deflector so that the  
handle, arrow 1, folds down and locks the  
wind deflector.  
Warning  
A wind deflector that has not been mounted  
correctly may fly off and be thrown into the  
vehicle or endanger other road users. There  
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-  
erty.  
3. Open the rear side window, if necessary.  
Before driving, make sure that the retaining  
pins are engaged in the mounting points and  
the wind deflector is mounted securely.  
4. Insert wind deflector from one side of the  
vehicle with the pins in the corresponding  
116  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
mounting points on the opposite side of the  
vehicle.  
9. Press the wind deflector downward in the  
middle, until the handle engages, arrows 1.  
10. Grasp the inner framework of the wind de-  
flector and fold it up, arrow 2.  
5. To release the lock, fold the handle up and  
hold it.  
Removing  
1. Fold the handle up to unlock the wind de-  
flector.  
2. Proceed in reverse order to remove the  
wind deflector.  
6. Press the wind deflector inwardly and up,  
arrow 1, to the extent that the wind deflector  
can be positioned in front of the mounting  
points on the installation side.  
7. Release the handle.  
8. Press the wind deflector downward, while  
inserting the pins in the corresponding  
mounting points, arrows 2.  
117  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
Sitting safely  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
Electrically adjustable seats  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 118.  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Seat belts, refer to page 121.  
Head restraints, refer to page 123.  
Airbags, refer to page 185.  
Overview  
Seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
1
Backrest width  
2
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt  
118  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Backrest tilt  
3
4
Backrest tilt, head restraint  
Lumbar support  
Longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Calibrating the front seats  
Press switch forward or backward.  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
Height  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
Safety information  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Press switch up or down.  
Seat tilt  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward until the seat stops.  
2. Press the switch forward again until the  
seat stops.  
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
119  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
If this message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Backrest width  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
Thigh support  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
Sport seat  
Adjusting  
▷
▷
Press the front section of the  
button:  
The backrest width de-  
creases.  
Press the rear section of the  
button:  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
The backrest width in-  
creases.  
Lumbar support  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest  
width at very high and very low temperatures.  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
Entering the rear  
Safety information  
Adjusting  
▷
▷
Press the front/rear section  
of the button:  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
The curvature is in-  
creased/decreased.  
Press the upper/lower sec-  
tion of the button:  
The curvature is shifted up/  
down.  
Warning  
Unexpected movements of the rear seat  
backrest while driving may occur if the rear  
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control  
could be lost. There is a risk of accident, in-  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar  
support at very high and very low tempera-  
tures.  
120  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
jury, or property damage. Fold back and lock  
the backrests before driving. Make sure the  
backrest engages correctly by slightly moving  
forward and back.  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
All belt fastening points are designed to ach-  
ieve the best possible protective effect of the  
seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and  
correct seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, re-  
fer to page 118.  
Fold the seat backrest forward  
1. Pull the lever.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.  
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat  
will automatically move to the most forward  
position.  
The process will be terminated when the  
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-  
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
Push the seat backrest rearward  
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.  
The seat moves automatically to the last seat  
position that was stored.  
Pulling the lever again stops the motion.  
Seat belts  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, the seat belts  
can only offer protection when adjusted cor-  
rectly.  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
121  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
Seat belt reminder for driver’s seat  
and passenger’s seat  
General information  
The seat belt reminder is issued when the driv-  
er's side seat belt is not buckled.  
Correct use of seat belts  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
The seat belt reminder is also active when the  
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob-  
jects are on the front passenger seat.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
The seat belt reminder is also activated when  
a passenger unbuckles a seat belt during the  
trip.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
The indicator light illuminates and a  
signal sounds. Make sure that the seat  
belts are positioned correctly. The seat  
belt reminder can also be activated if objects  
are placed on the front passenger seat.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Seat belt reminder for rear seats  
General information  
The seat belt reminder is automatically acti-  
vated each time the engine starts.  
The seat belt reminder is also activated when  
a passenger unbuckles a rear seat belt during  
the trip.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after the engine is started.  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment version and country variant.  
122  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
Warning  
Green: the seat belt is buckled  
on the corresponding rear seat.  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Red: the seat belt is not buck-  
led on the corresponding rear  
seat.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
Front head restraints  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
General information  
The current head restraint position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Safety information  
Adjusting the height: M sport seats  
Warning  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Press switch up or down.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
To prevent a collision of the head restraint with  
the convertible top, the head restraint cannot  
be adjusted in height in certain seat positions.  
Move the seat into a lower position for head  
restraint adjustment.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
123  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the height: M Carbon  
bucket seat  
Exterior mirrors  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Adjusting the distance  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro-  
file currently in use. When a driver profile is  
selected, the saved position is called up auto-  
matically.  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
The current exterior mirror position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Removing  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Overview  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Adjusting the height  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
1
Adjusting  
2
3
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in and out  
Removing  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Press the button.  
124  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The selected mirror moves along with the but-  
ton movement.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Selecting a mirror  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
Activating  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror  
glass.  
1.  
Slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Folding in and out  
Deactivating  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
exterior mirror position.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Before washing,  
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Interior mirror  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Press the button.  
Photocells are used for control:  
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-  
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the  
following situations:  
Overview  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On narrow roads.  
Mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Functional requirements  
Automatic dimming feature  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
125  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Steering wheel heating  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Overview  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
stationary only.  
Button for steering wheel heating  
Electric steering wheel adjustment  
Turning on/off  
General information  
Press the button.  
The steering wheel adjustment is stored for  
the driver profile currently in use. When a driver  
profile is selected, the position is called up  
automatically when the drive-ready state is  
turned on.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes  
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel  
heating turns on automatically if the function  
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.  
The current steering wheel position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
To make it easier to enter and get out of the  
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily  
into the upper position.  
Memory function  
Principle  
Adjusting  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror position.  
Steering wheel position.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back  
position and height of the steering wheel to the  
seat position.  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷
▷
Backrest width.  
Lumbar support.  
126  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The stored position is called up.  
Safety information  
The procedure stops when a switch for setting  
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but-  
tons is pressed again.  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only retrieve the memory function  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Seat and armrest heating  
Principle  
Warning  
The system heats seats and armrests as  
needed.  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
General information  
Seat heating can also be used without arm-  
rest heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as  
needed.  
Overview  
Overview  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
door.  
Seat and armrest heating  
Storing  
1. Set the desired position.  
Turning on  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED in the  
button illuminates.  
2. Select the temperature level:  
▷
▷
Press the button once for each level.  
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the  
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.  
Turn the Controller until the desired  
level is reached. Press the Controller.  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired button 1 or 2.  
▷
Select the desired level on the touch-  
screen.  
127  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Highest level reached when three red LEDs  
illuminate on the button or three red bars  
are shown on the control display.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
Very hot air can escape from the vents. Thus,  
there is a risk of burns in the immediate area  
of the vents. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that sufficient distance from the vents is  
maintained. If necessary, adjust the air inlet.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
NOTICE  
By covering the vent of the air collar, the heat  
cannot escape as intended. The heat builds  
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not cover the vents, for instance with covers.  
Switching armrest heating on/off  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Seat and armrest heating"  
5. Select desired seat.  
6. "Heat armrests with seat"  
Overview  
Air collar  
Principle  
The air collar ensures just the right tempera-  
ture for the neck area via warm air inlet.  
Air collar  
General information  
When the convertible top is open, the air inlet  
and the temperature are adjusted according to  
speed and outside temperature.  
Turning on  
Press button once for each level.  
When the convertible top is closed, the three  
adjustable settings are independent of speed  
and outside temperature.  
The maximum temperature and  
blower output is reached when three LEDs are  
illuminated.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
128  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Highest level reached when three blue  
LEDs illuminate on the button or three blue  
bars are shown on the control display.  
Active seat ventilation  
Principle  
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas  
extract air from the vehicle interior and thereby  
provide a comfortable seat temperature.  
Switching off active seat ventilation  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
General information  
Depending on the setting of the automatic  
climate control, the cooling output will be in-  
creased or reduced.  
Seat climate control  
Principle  
Air conditioning can be adjusted individually by  
manually adjusting the temperature of the ven-  
tilation and the air distribution.  
The seat climate control combines the func-  
tions of the seat heating and active seat venti-  
lation.  
For maximum cooling power, set the manual  
air distribution to the upper body area.  
General information  
The seat heating and active seat ventilation  
are operated with a common button on the air  
conditioning control panel.  
Overview  
When both systems are active, a push of the  
button reduces the intensity of both functions  
by one level each.  
The last active function or function that is con-  
figured with higher intensity will be activated  
directly when the system is switched on again.  
When both functions with the same intensity  
configuration are deactivated, the system will  
automatically activate the seat heating.  
Active seat ventilation  
Overview  
Switching on active seat ventilation  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Select the ventilation level:  
▷
▷
Press the button once for each level.  
Turn the Controller until the desired  
level is reached. Press the Controller.  
▷
Select the desired level on the touch-  
screen.  
Seat climate control  
129  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Turning on  
Functional requirement  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Select the desired setting via the touch-  
screen.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
One red and one blue LED each will illumi-  
nate.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Activate the desired rule.  
7. Set the level.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
Climate control rules  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, some heating  
and air conditioning functions can be automat-  
ically activated depending on the outside tem-  
perature.  
General information  
The outside temperature at which the func-  
tions are to be automatically activated can be  
set via iDrive.  
Activation is performed if the outside temper-  
ature exceeds or falls below the set tempera-  
ture in the first few minutes after drive-ready  
state has been switched on. A new adjustment  
is carried out after the settings have been  
changed.  
Depending on the equipment package, the  
following functions can be automatically acti-  
vated:  
▷
▷
▷
Seat heating.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Seat ventilation.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after a stop, the functions are activated  
automatically with the levels that were last se-  
lected.  
130  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Children in the rear seat  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
General information  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
131  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
Before using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,  
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 187.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
132  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating the airbags  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
Additional information:  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 187.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
LATCH child restraint  
system  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a  
child restraint system in the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using LATCH child restraint sys-  
tems.  
133  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for the lower LATCH  
anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
Before installing the LATCH child  
restraint systems  
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the  
child seat mountings.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Installation of the LATCH child  
restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop-  
erly engaged.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
134  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Attachment points  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
Routing the retaining strap  
Warning  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
1
Driving direction  
Warning  
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point/eye  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.  
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the  
head restraint to the anchor.  
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
4. Fold back the backrest of the rear seat.  
Make sure that the retaining strap cannot  
be jammed when folding back and locking  
the rear seat backrest.  
135  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
5. Tighten the retaining strap.  
6. Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it  
136  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Vehicle features and options Auto Start/Stop function  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
The system switches off the engine during a  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
General information  
After each engine start using the Start/Stop  
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.  
The function is activated from speeds of ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Start/Stop button  
Principle  
Engine stop  
Pressing the Start/Stop button  
switches drive-ready state on or  
off.  
Functional requirements  
Drive-ready state is switched on  
when you depress the brake  
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
The engine is switched off automatically during  
a stop under the following conditions:  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches  
the drive-ready state back off and standby  
state is switched back on.  
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.  
Standby state, refer to page 40.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
Driving off  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
manual engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can  
be switched off manually:  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
4. Driving off.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
▷
Engage selector lever position P.  
137  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
▷
▷
Where there is a risk of window condensa-  
tion when the automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
Engine or other parts not at operating tem-  
perature.  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the  
steering wheel is being turned.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
General information  
Hood is unlocked.  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
▷
Stop-and-go traffic.  
Selector lever position in N or R.  
After driving in reverse.  
The display indicates that the  
conditions for an automatic en-  
gine stop have not been met.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
Indications on the control display  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
Total time with switched-off engine  
The total time for which the Auto Start/Stop  
function has switched off the engine is dis-  
played in the trip data.  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
The total time is automatically reset every time  
the vehicle is refueled.  
Driving off  
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.  
Functional limitations  
The engine is not switched off automatically in  
the following situations:  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it  
will not start again automatically if any one of  
the following conditions are met:  
▷
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
Brake not engaged strongly enough.  
The outside temperature is high and auto-  
matic climate control is running.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷
The car's interior has not yet been heated  
or cooled to the required level.  
▷
Hood was unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
138  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The engine can only be started via the Start/  
Stop button.  
The function may be restricted if the naviga-  
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,  
for example.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
Activating/deactivating the system  
manually  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
In case of excessive warming of the interior  
when air conditioning is turned on.  
The engine is not automatically switched off.  
In case of excessive cooling of the interior  
when the heating is turned on.  
The engine is started during an automatic en-  
gine stop.  
In case of a risk of window condensa-  
tion when the automatic climate control is  
turned on.  
Via button  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Without mild hybrid technology: in case of a  
steering operation.  
When changing from selector lever position  
D to N or R.  
When changing from selector lever position  
P to N, D, or R.  
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-  
tery.  
Press the button.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
Additional functions Auto Start/Stop  
Display  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle features a variety of  
sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The  
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information  
to adapt to various traffic situations in an antic-  
ipatory manner.  
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop function  
is deactivated.  
▷
LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is  
activated.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
For instance, this applies to the following sit-  
uations:  
▷
A situation is detected in which the stop-  
ping time is expected to be very short. The  
engine is not automatically switched off. A  
message appears on the control display,  
depending on the situation.  
General information  
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle  
can be switched off permanently, for instance  
when leaving it.  
▷
A situation is detected in which the vehi-  
cle should be started up immediately. The  
switched-off engine starts automatically.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
139  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
General information  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Malfunction  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer  
switches off the engine automatically. A Check  
Control message is displayed. It is possible to  
continue driving. Have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Parking brake  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Parking brake  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
140  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The parking brake is released.  
Setting the parking brake  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
With a stationary vehicle  
Pull the switch.  
The LED illuminates.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red. The parking  
brake is set.  
Automatic Hold  
Principle  
While driving  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-  
cally setting and releasing the brake such as  
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.  
General information  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when  
it is stationary.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is being  
pulled.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-  
cle from rolling back when driving off.  
General information  
Under the following conditions, the parking  
brake is automatically engaged:  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
The driver's door is opened while the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
▷
The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-  
still using the parking brake.  
With Emergency Stop Assistant  
Pull the switch briefly to activate the  
emergency stop function.  
Safety information  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 210.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Releasing the parking brake  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
2.  
Press the switch while stepping on  
the brake pedal or selector lever position P  
is set.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
141  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Overview  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Automatic Hold  
Establishing operational readiness of  
Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED illuminates.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is ready to use.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
After every vehicle restart, the last se-  
lected setting is active.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Operational readiness is established and the  
driver's door is closed.  
NOTICE  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold  
engages the parking brake and prevents the  
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto-  
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.  
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is  
kept from rolling away as soon as the  
indicator light illuminates green.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
Activating the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
142  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi-  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
deactivated.  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Switching operational readiness off  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
Flashing  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press on the brake pedal when switching  
off.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault,  
secure the vehicle against rolling away before  
exiting.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
One-touch signaling  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1. "CAR"  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake functionality after  
a power interruption:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "One-touch turn signal"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on  
the brake pedal or while selector lever po-  
sition P is set and then push.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-  
ess are normal.  
143  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
age to property. Do not use the wipers when  
the window is dry.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Turning on window wiper system  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor, position 1.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-  
144  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Activating rain sensor  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
Press the lever up once from its 0 position,  
arrow 1.  
Press the lever down.  
Wiping operation is started.  
▷
Turn off: press the lever down until it  
reaches the 0 position.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-  
sition when released.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press the lever back into the 0 position.  
Rain sensor  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
Safety information  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
NOTICE  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
145  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Windshield washer system  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Safety information  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident. Only use the win-  
dow washer system when the washer fluid  
will not freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-  
freeze, if needed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Cleaning the windshield  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,  
and the wipers are turned on briefly.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
The windshield washer nozzles are automati-  
cally heated while standby state is switched  
on.  
146  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
Various driving programs: Drive mode or  
sequential mode.  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Low Speed Assistant.  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until  
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.  
Various Drivelogic programs.  
Launch Control.  
Upshifting display, Shift lights.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
Overview  
Selector lever  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and  
hold the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
Selector lever functions  
Icon  
Function  
M Steptronic Sport  
transmission  
DriveLogic modes.  
Reverse gear.  
Neutral.  
R
N
General information  
The M Steptronic Sport transmission is oper-  
ated via the selector lever or the two shift pad-  
dles on the steering wheel.  
Center position, forward posi-  
tion.  
-
Downshifting, manual.  
Upshifting, manual.  
The following functions are available:  
+
147  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
not pressed while the vehicle is stationary  
and the selector lever is set to D/S or R.  
Icon  
Function  
D/S  
Drive mode or sequential  
mode.  
Engaging a selector lever position  
P
Parking.  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
Selector lever positions  
D is Drive mode  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel are activated automatically.  
The engaged selector lever position is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster and on the  
selector lever.  
S is Sequential mode  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel must be shifted manually.  
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,  
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and  
gear position D without pressing the brake.  
R is reverse  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Functional requirements  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
N is Neutral  
In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be  
pushed or roll without power, for instance, in  
car washes.  
Engaging selector lever position D/S,  
N, R  
P Park  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
wheels in selector lever position P.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
▷
▷
After the drive-ready state or standby state  
is switched off and selector lever position  
D/S or R is engaged.  
With the driver's seat belt fastened, press on  
the brake pedal and pull or push the selector  
lever in the required direction. The selector  
lever automatically returns to the center posi-  
tion when released.  
After the standby state has been switched  
off when selector lever position N is en-  
gaged.  
In selector lever position R, the selector lever  
locks.  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driv-  
er's door is opened, and the brake pedal is  
148  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Press button P.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 153.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
Kickdown  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum drive  
power in Drive mode.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
Drive mode D/S  
NOTICE  
Principle  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,  
in a car wash.  
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati-  
cally changed.  
Activating Drive mode  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 141.  
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.  
5. If necessary, open the door.  
Push the selector lever out of the center posi-  
tion in the D/S direction.  
6. Depress the brake pedal.  
7. Engage selector lever position N.  
8. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Drive mode is activated. The engaged gear is  
displayed in the instrument cluster along with a  
D, e.g., 1 D.  
149  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating Drive mode  
Deactivating sequential mode  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode  
in the D/S direction. Sequential mode is acti-  
vated.  
Push the selector lever out of the center po-  
sition in the D/S direction. Drive mode is acti-  
vated.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, e.g., 1.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster along with a D, e.g., 1 D.  
Sequential mode D/S  
Gear change  
Principle  
Principle  
In sequential mode, it is possible to shift gears  
manually using the selector lever or the shift  
paddles without letting off the gas.  
Manual gear-shifting is possible via the shift  
paddles or the selector lever in sequential  
mode.  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to change gears quickly while keeping  
both hands on the steering wheel.  
General information  
Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent  
minimum speed, the transmission is automati-  
cally downshifted.  
General information  
Once the maximum engine speed is attained,  
upshifting is not automatically performed in  
sequential mode and the kickdown is deacti-  
vated.  
Shifting  
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine  
and road speeds; for instance, downshifting is  
not possible if the engine speed is too high.  
It is also possible to drive off in 2nd gear;  
for instance, on icy roads.  
The lowest possible gear is selected by simul-  
taneously operating the kickdown and moving  
the selector lever forward or actuating the left  
shift paddle.  
Activating sequential mode  
Temporary sequential mode  
After a shift paddle is actuated in Drive mode,  
the system temporarily switches to sequential  
mode.  
After conservative driving in sequential mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to Drive mode.  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in  
the D/S direction, arrow 1, or shift via the selec-  
tor lever, arrows at 2.  
Permanent sequential mode  
Sequential mode remains permanently active if  
it was active before the shift paddle was actu-  
ated.  
Sequential mode is activated. The engaged  
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g.,  
1.  
150  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Switching to Drive mode  
Sequential mode  
It is possible to switch to Drive mode as fol-  
lows: pull and hold the right shift paddle.  
▷
▷
▷
Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.  
Engaged gear, arrow 2.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 3.  
Switching via the selector lever  
▷
Upshifting: pull the selector lever rear-  
wards.  
Notice  
▷
Downshifting: press the selector lever for-  
ward.  
When the outside temperature is very low, the  
display may not work. Current driving direction  
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever  
position.  
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se-  
quential mode.  
Switching via the shift paddles  
Low Speed Assistant  
Principle  
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at  
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking  
speed.  
General information  
Use the Low Speed Assistant for maneuvering  
or in stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
Upshift: pull right shift paddle.  
Downshift: pull left shift paddle.  
The Low Speed Assistant can also be used  
for rocking the vehicle free in the snow. To do  
this, change over between reverse gear and  
forward gear without stepping on the brakes in  
the process.  
Display on the selector lever  
The actually engaged transmission position  
can deviate from the selector lever position in  
some situations. The display in the selector  
lever flashes.  
Activating  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
Observe the display in the instrument cluster in  
these cases.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
4. Engage selector lever position D/S or R.  
5. Release brake.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Drive mode  
In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle  
rolls at minimum speed.  
▷
▷
Engaged gear together with  
a D, arrow 1.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 2.  
Deactivating  
Decelerate the vehicle to a stop.  
151  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Selecting a program  
Drivelogic  
Via the rocker switch on the selector lever  
Principle  
Drivelogic changes the gear-shifting character-  
istics of the M Steptronic Sport transmission.  
For example, the shifting points are changed in  
Drive mode and the shifting times in sequential  
mode.  
General information  
Three Drivelogic programs are available.  
After each switch between Sequential mode  
and Drive mode, the last program selected is  
an active.  
Press the rocker switch repeatedly un-  
til the desired program is displayed in  
the instrument cluster.  
If the drive-ready state is switched on after  
the vehicle has been in the idle state and is  
in Drive mode, the D1 program is activated.  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
Programs  
1. "CAR"  
Pro-  
gram  
Drive mode  
Sequential  
mode  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Transmission"  
5. Select the desired program  
"M menu"  
Efficient driving.  
Comfortable  
shifting opera-  
tions.  
D1/S1  
Fast driving.  
Sporty, fast shift-  
ing operations.  
▷
▷
"D1" to "D3": Drive mode.  
D2/S2  
D3/S3  
"S1" to "S3": sequential mode.  
Sporty driving.  
Maximum shift-  
ing speed,  
Launch Control.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
▷
▷
152  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Launch Control  
The selected program corre-  
sponds to the number of illumi-  
nated fields.  
Principle  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
General information  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents  
a very heavy load for the vehicle.  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving  
off with Launch Control.  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank  
the engine.  
Additional information:  
Break-in, refer to page 308.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-  
ing away.  
Functional requirements  
Launch Control is available when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter  
must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop but-  
ton pressed.  
Starting with launch control  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
3. With your free hand, press and hold the se-  
lector lever in selector lever position N, until  
selector lever position N is displayed in the  
instrument cluster.  
2. Deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 222.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
3. Select sequential mode with gear 1 and  
Drivelogic program S3.  
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector  
lever.  
4. With your left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter  
stops.  
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-  
tle position, kickdown.  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
Additional information:  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 363.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within  
3 seconds, release the brake. The vehicle  
accelerates.  
153  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as  
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-  
celerator pedal is not released.  
haust system. The sound takes on a sporty  
nature.  
Selecting a program  
Repeated use during a trip  
Using the button  
After Launch Control has been used, it is  
necessary to drive a certain distance before  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions,  
when used again.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
Press the button and select the de-  
sired program on the control display.  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
M Engine Dynamics Control  
1. "CAR"  
Principle  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Engine"  
"M menu"  
The M Engine Dynamics Control affects the  
response of the vehicle to accelerator pedal  
movements.  
5. Select the desired program.  
General information  
The system offers several different types of  
engine response characteristics:  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
Program  
Response characteristics  
"EFFICIENT"  
Efficient, comfortable. Mini-  
mal consumption.  
▷
Ideal, for instance in city traf-  
fic or on snow.  
▷
"SPORT"  
Sporty, dynamic.  
"SPORT  
PLUS"  
Spontaneous, direct. Maxi-  
mum dynamics.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display of the widget in the  
instrument cluster for M SETUP is ac-  
The "SPORT" and "SPORT PLUS" programs  
change the sound characteristics of the ex-  
154  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
tivated, the selected program is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 159.  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Sound Control"  
"M menu"  
Sound control  
5. Select the desired program.  
Principle  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
The sound control function changes the sound  
characteristics of the exhaust system.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
General information  
When sound control is switched on, the sound  
of the exhaust system takes on a sporty na-  
ture.  
▷
▷
When sound control is switched off, the sound  
is focused on comfort.  
During the engine warm-up phase, sound con-  
trol does not have any effect on the sound of  
the exhaust system.  
Additional information:  
High-performance engine, refer to page 306.  
Selecting a program  
Using the button  
Press button to activate or deactivate the  
sound control.  
The LED illuminates when sound control is  
switched on.  
155  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Overview  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
1
Fuel gauge 167  
Range 169  
Instrument cluster  
2
3
Speedometer  
Central display range 156  
Navigation display  
General information  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-  
tion Camera  
Tachometer 168  
Selection lists 171  
Safety information  
Widgets 159  
Trip odometer, see Trip data 172  
Warning  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: gear dis-  
play with Drivelogic 169  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
6
7
Engine oil temperature 168  
Outside temperature 169  
Check Control 160  
8
9
Speed Limit Assistant 241  
Speed Limit Info 226  
Time 61  
Central display range  
Depending on the equipment and configura-  
tion, the following is displayed in the central  
display range of the instrument cluster:  
156  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
Navigation displays such as the map view  
or, if destination guidance is active, a route  
preview with route guidance information.  
Configuring M MODE  
Depending on the selected View mode, various  
settings can be selected.  
▷
▷
Displays for service notifications.  
1. "CAR"  
Assisted Driving View. Information about  
the assist systems is displayed in an ani-  
mated surrounding area of the vehicle.  
2.  
"M menu"  
3. "Instrument panel"  
4. "Configure view"  
Some displays in the central display range can  
be configured individually.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment and national-market version.  
Configuring additional displays  
Depending on the view, additional displays can  
be configured for the outer left area of the in-  
strument cluster.  
View on the instrument cluster  
Principle  
1. "CAR"  
The display in the instrument cluster changes  
depending on the program that was selected  
via the M MODE button.  
2.  
"M menu"  
3. "Instrument panel"  
4. "Configure view"  
General information  
The following views are available:  
5. "Widget selection, left"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
▷
"ROAD": All driver assistance systems and  
Intelligent Safety displays are active on  
the instrument cluster for comfort-oriented  
driving.  
Display  
▷
"SPORT": Driver assistance systems and  
Intelligent Safety displays are reduced to a  
minimum. The digital speed, gear display  
with Drivelogic and the tachometer are dis-  
played centered in the instrument cluster  
and support a sporty driving style. Addi-  
tional displays, e.g., information about tires  
and engine, can be configured for the outer  
area of the instrument cluster.  
1
Additional displays  
2
3
4
Tachometer  
▷
Depending on the equipment:  
Gear display with Drivelogic  
Widgets in the instrument cluster  
"TRACK": All comfort-oriented driver assis-  
tance systems and Intelligent Safety dis-  
plays are deactivated for driving on a race-  
track. Additional displays, e.g., information  
about tires and engine, can be configured  
for the outer area of the instrument cluster.  
157  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Temporary display  
1. "CAR"  
Assisted Driving View  
2.  
"M menu"  
Principle  
3. "Instrument panel"  
4. "Configure view"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, information  
on driver assistance systems is displayed us-  
ing an animation of the vehicle when driver  
assistance is enabled.  
5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver  
Assistance is active"  
General information  
Assisted Driving View is available in the stand-  
ard ROAD view.  
Display  
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving  
View can be displayed permanently or tempo-  
rarily with active Driver Assistance in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Safety information  
An example: the indicator and warning lights  
for the Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function and the Lane Change Assistant indi-  
cate a lane change to the next lane. At the  
same time, the lane change to the next lane is  
shown with animation in the Assisted Driving  
View.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system may indicate something wrong.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
Settings  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Permanent display  
1. "CAR"  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
2.  
"M menu"  
3. "Instrument panel"  
4. "Configure view"  
5. "Central display area"  
6. "Assisted Driving View"  
158  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
G-Meter  
Instrument cluster with  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
extended features: widgets  
Principle  
Displays for specific functions can be displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
Consumption display  
Principle  
The following displays can be selected:  
Information about consumption can be dis-  
played in the form of a consumption display as  
a widget in the instrument cluster, for example.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.  
Torque and power.  
G-Meter.  
Trip data.  
Average consumption  
The average consumption indicates the fuel  
consumption when driving a specific route.  
Consumption display.  
Tire data.  
M SETUP display.  
Engine data.  
Current consumption  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
Selecting  
Energy recovery  
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of  
the vehicle is converted into electric energy in  
coasting/overrun mode. The vehicle battery is  
partially charged and fuel consumption can be  
reduced.  
Continue to press the button on the turn signal  
lever until the desired widget is selected.  
Tire data  
Information about wheels and tires can be dis-  
played in the instrument cluster as widget.  
Display  
M SETUP display  
Some of the systems are displayed with their  
current settings, e.g., steering.  
Engine data  
Coolant temperature and boost pressure of the  
exhaust turbocharger can be displayed in the  
instrument cluster as widget.  
159  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Check Control  
1. "CAR"  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle status"  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
General information  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed as a  
combination of indicator or warning lights and  
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if  
applicable, in the Head-up display.  
Check Control  
At least one Check Control message is  
displayed or stored.  
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and  
a text message may appear on the control dis-  
play.  
Text messages  
Text messages in combination with an icon  
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-  
trol message and the meaning of the indica-  
tor/warning lights.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Supplementary text messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
With urgent messages the added text will be  
automatically displayed on the control display.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
Continuous display  
1. "CAR"  
Some Check Control messages are displayed  
continuously and are not cleared until the fault  
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,  
the messages are displayed consecutively.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The messages can be hidden for approx.  
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed  
again automatically.  
Messages after trip completion  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Temporary display  
Some Check Control messages are hidden  
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The  
Check Control messages are stored and can  
be displayed again later.  
160  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Indicator/warning lights  
Principle  
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus-  
ter display the status of some functions in the  
vehicle and indicate when a fault is present in  
the monitored systems.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 185.  
General information  
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a  
variety of combinations and colors.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
For releasing the parking brake, refer to  
page 141.  
Red lights  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Seat belt reminder  
Indicator light illuminates in the follow-  
ing situations:  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for the braking process.  
▷
Seat belt on the driver or passenger  
side is not buckled.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
▷
▷
The seat belt reminder can also be acti-  
vated if objects are placed on the front  
passenger seat.  
The seat belt is not buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
If equipped with Equipment Stop  
Assistant  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered.  
Additional information:  
Rear seat belt reminder: seat detection  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 210.  
The seat belt is not buckled on the cor-  
responding rear seat.  
Risk of collision  
Warning light illuminates or flashes in  
conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is risk of imminent collision.  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
Additional information:  
▷
Intersection Collision Warning with city  
braking function, refer to page 196.  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
161  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Forward Collision Warning with  
braking function  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision  
Mitigation  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
The warning light illuminates and a sig-  
nal sounds: risk of imminent collision  
with a person, e.g., a pedestrian or a  
cyclist detected. Immediately initiate braking or  
an evasive maneuver.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Additional information:  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer  
to page 199.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-  
tion, refer to page 191.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a vehicle crossing from the  
right detected. Increased awareness is  
required.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,  
refer to page 233.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Steering Assistant  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version: The warning  
light flashes or illuminates.  
Additional information:  
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking  
function, refer to page 196.  
A signal sounds: the system is switched off.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:  
hands not on steering wheel  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a vehicle crossing from the  
left detected. Increased awareness is  
required.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. System interruption is imminent.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
Additional information:  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking  
function, refer to page 196.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
162  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has failed or is being initialized. Driving  
stability is restricted or has failed.  
Yellow lights  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Antilock Braking System  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Additional information:  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 222.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated  
The Dynamic Stability Control is deac-  
tivated or the M Dynamic Mode is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 216.  
Additional information:  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 222.  
Steering Assistant  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal may sound: A system interrup-  
tion is imminent.  
▷
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 223.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Additional information:  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:  
hands not on steering wheel  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 336.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Tire pressure monitor  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the drive and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
163  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
▷
▷
▷
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Additional information:  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 353.  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Green lights  
Rear seats: seat belt fastened  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
Additional information:  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 330.  
Rear seats: seat detection  
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
Steering system  
Steering system may not be opera-  
tional.  
Turn signal  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Turn signal is on.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Exhaust emissions  
Additional information:  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
Turn signal, refer to page 143.  
Worsening exhaust emissions, e.g.,  
due to an incorrectly fitted fuel cap.  
Have the vehicle checked as soon  
as possible.  
Parking lights  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 178.  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Low-beam headlights  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 178.  
164  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Driving, refer to page 137.  
Lane departure warning  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on. A lane boundary has been  
detected on at least one side of the vehicle and  
the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will  
be issued. The system can perform steering  
interventions.  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Additional information:  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 228.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-  
ing a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Depending on the equipment: Cruise  
Control  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 201.  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-  
trol, refer to page 226.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
switched on.  
High-beam headlights are switched on  
and off automatically depending on the traffic  
situation.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function switched on  
Additional information:  
The system is turned on.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 180.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function, refer to page 233.  
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held  
automatically  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function: vehicle ahead  
Steptronic transmission: Automatic  
Hold is activated. The vehicle is auto-  
matically held in place when it is sta-  
tionary.  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
Additional information:  
Driving, refer to page 137.  
Indicator light is flashing: vehicle ahead is driv-  
ing off.  
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured  
against rolling away  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,  
refer to page 233.  
Steptronic transmission: The vehicle is  
prevented from rolling away after the  
brake is applied.  
Additional information:  
165  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 249.  
Speed Limit Assistant activated  
Depending on the equipment, the indi-  
cator light is illuminated together with  
the icon for a speed control system:  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected  
speed limits can be accepted manually for the  
displayed system.  
Lane Change Assistant: functional  
requirements not met  
Depending on the national-market ver-  
sion:  
Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane  
change not possible; functional requirements  
not met.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 241.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant: apply speed  
limit  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 249.  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 248.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 241.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Steering Assistant  
A different icon may appear, depending  
on vehicle equipment.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 248.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Blue lights  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
High-beam headlights  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 249.  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 144.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change  
not possible  
Gray lights  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
166  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 228.  
White lights  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
Depending on the equipment: Cruise  
Control  
No Distance Control displayed since  
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-  
trol, refer to page 226.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,  
refer to page 233.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is ready.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 248.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-  
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes  
until you actively resume control by pressing  
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
M xDrive: rear-wheel drive activated  
The M xDrive 2WD program is acti-  
vated. The driving forces are distrib-  
uted via the rear axle.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,  
refer to page 233.  
Additional information:  
M xDrive, refer to page 224.  
Steering Assistant  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
Fuel gauge  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
General information  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
The system is interrupted and will acti-  
vate automatically as soon as all func-  
tional requirements are met.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 316.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 248.  
167  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
An arrow next to the fuel pump  
icon indicates the vehicle side  
on which the fuel filler flap is lo-  
cated.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
The current range is displayed  
as numerical value.  
READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster. The Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
automatic engine start.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Additional information:  
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Tachometer  
Engine oil temperature  
General information  
The engine has a permissible rotational speed  
range. Excessive speeds are indicated by a  
yellow prewarning field and a red warning field.  
The permissible speed increases as the engine  
oil temperature increases.  
Display  
▷
▷
Cold engine: the needle is at  
the low temperature value.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
Normal operating tempera-  
ture: the needle is in the mid-  
dle or in the lower half of the  
temperature display.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. This reduction is represented by  
shifting the yellow and red advance warning  
zone in the tachometer. The maximum possi-  
ble engine speed corresponds to the beginning  
of the red range.  
▷
Hot engine: the needle is at the high tem-  
perature value. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Coolant level, refer to page 349.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
168  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Outside temperature  
The current speed is displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower,  
a signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
M Steptronic Sport  
transmission: gear display  
with Drivelogic  
Safety information  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
Sequential mode  
▷
▷
▷
Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.  
Engaged gear, arrow 2.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 3.  
Drive mode  
▷
Engaged gear together with  
a D, arrow 1.  
Digital tachometer  
▷
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 2.  
General information  
The digital tachometer is permanently dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Range  
Adjusting the unit  
Depending on the country version, it may be  
possible to set the unit for the digital tachome-  
ter.  
Principle  
The range indicates the distance that can still  
be covered with the current full tank of fuel.  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
2. "Settings"  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Units"  
5. "Distance"  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
169  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
Display  
Detailed information on the service  
notifications  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
1. "CAR"  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel  
promptly.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Required services"  
Maintenance work as well as possible le-  
gally mandated inspections are displayed.  
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa-  
tion.  
Display  
Icons  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to the  
fuel gauge.  
Icons  
Description  
No service is currently required.  
The time for recommended main-  
tenance or a legally mandated in-  
spection is approaching.  
Service notifications  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
Service interval is exceeded.  
General information  
Entering appointment dates  
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in-  
spections.  
After turning on the drive-ready state, the next  
service appointment or the distance remaining  
until the next service is displayed briefly in the  
instrument cluster.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Some information on service notifications can  
also be shown on the BMW display key.  
3.  
"Required services"  
4. "Vehicle inspection"  
5. "Date:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
170  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the gear shift indicator is active  
in sequential mode of the M Steptronic Sport  
transmission.  
Depending on the equipment version, the list  
in the instrument cluster may differ from the  
illustration.  
Displaying and using the list  
The lists can be displayed and operated using  
the buttons on the steering wheel.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
displays  
Icon  
Description  
Button  
Function  
Upshift to efficient gear.  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed  
list.  
Selection lists  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Principle  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
Turn the knurled wheel to se-  
lect the desired setting.  
Press the knurled wheel to  
confirm the setting.  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Current audio source.  
The list of the current en-  
tertainment source can be  
displayed in the instrument  
cluster again by turning the  
knurled wheel.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
171  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Total kilometers.  
Trip data  
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., trip distance.  
▷
Average speed.  
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument  
cluster.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Widgets, refer to page 159.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on various intervals such as after refu-  
eling.  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Display on the control display  
1. "CAR"  
Overview  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
The following information is displayed depend-  
ing on the set interval and driving mode:  
4. "Values since"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average consumption depending on the  
configured interval.  
▷
▷
▷
"Start of trip ( )": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
▷
▷
Average speed.  
Total time for shut off engine through the  
Auto Start/Stop function.  
"Refueling ( )": the values are automati-  
cally reset after refueling with a larger  
quantity of fuel.  
▷
Consumption history in form of a chart.  
"Factory": average consumption since  
delivery from the factory.  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
The values since the time of the factory  
delivery are displayed.  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
▷
"Individual ( )": the values since the last  
manual reset are displayed. The values  
can be reset at any time.  
Consumption history  
The average consumption is shown in the con-  
sumption history in form of a chart based on  
the distance traveled.  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time: "Individual ( )".  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment, information  
about the distance covered can be displayed  
as widget in the instrument cluster.  
The following information is displayed:  
172  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
With the button on the turn signal lever:  
▷
▷
Torque.  
Power.  
1. Continue to press the button on the turn  
signal lever until the widget for the trip data  
is selected.  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Sport displays"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of  
widgets in the instrument cluster.  
The following widgets can be selected:  
▷
▷
Widget for torque and power.  
Widget for G-Meter.  
2. Press and hold the button on the turn sig-  
nal lever.  
Via iDrive:  
Additional information:  
Widgets, refer to page 159.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
Vehicle status  
4. "Values since"  
5. "Reset individual"  
General information  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally set: "Individual ( )".  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems.  
Going to the vehicle status  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Sport displays  
Information at a glance  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Icons  
Description  
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of  
the flat tire monitor, refer to  
page 336.  
Display on the control display  
Overview  
The following information is displayed:  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 330.  
▷
▷
▷
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
G-Meter.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 347.  
173  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Icons  
Description  
"Check Control messages":  
displaying stored Check Con-  
trol messages, refer to  
page 160.  
Overview  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
"Required services": display of  
the service notifications, refer  
to page 170.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Selection list in the instrument cluster.  
Driver assistance systems.  
BMW Head-up display  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
Principle  
Selecting displays in the Head-up  
display  
1. "CAR"  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance  
the speed.  
2. "Settings"  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Overview  
Configuring M MODE  
Depending on the selected View mode, various  
settings can be selected.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Configure view"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The protective glass of the Head-up display is  
located in the position marked.  
M view  
The M view on the Head-up display is a sport-  
ier view specific to M and is active in the M  
MODES SPORT and TRACK.  
Turning on/off  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
Setting the brightness  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the  
ambient brightness.  
174  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The base setting can be adjusted manually.  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Objects on the protective glass of the  
Head-up display.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷
Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the  
Head-up display.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Brightness"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-  
ness is set.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
7. Press the Controller.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
When the low-beam headlights are switched  
on, the brightness of the Head-up display can  
be adjusted using the instrument lighting.  
Adjusting the height  
1. "CAR"  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
2. "Settings"  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Height"  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height  
is reached.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Shift lights  
The height of the Head-up display can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Principle  
Shift lights on the instrument cluster indicate  
the time to upshift in order to achieve the best  
possible acceleration.  
Setting the rotation  
The Head-up display view can be rotated.  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
If the Head-up display is switched on, the Shift  
lights will be displayed in the Head-up display.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Rotation"  
Shift lights are only shown in the Head-up dis-  
play in the M view.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting  
is selected.  
If the Head-up display is switched off, the Shift  
lights are displayed in the instrument cluster.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
175  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Shift lights in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
▷
Current engine speed is displayed in the  
tachometer.  
Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields  
indicate the upcoming shift point.  
Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do not  
wait any further to shift.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes. The fuel  
supply is reduced to protect the engine.  
Shift lights in the Head-up display  
▷
▷
▷
Current engine speed is displayed in the  
tachometer.  
Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields  
indicate the upcoming shift point.  
Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do not  
wait any further to shift.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes and the fuel  
supply is interrupted in order to protect the en-  
gine.  
176  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Lights  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Low-beam headlights.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Instrument lighting.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Lights and lighting  
Automatic headlight control  
Switches in the vehicle  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
The light switch is located next to the steering  
wheel.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
Icon  
Function  
Lights off.  
Activating  
Daytime driving lights.  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Parking lights.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive lighting functions.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
177  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the  
automatic headlight control will be activated.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Low-beam headlights  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
General information  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Turning off  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be switched off in  
the low speed range.  
Parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be switched on in  
the low speed range.  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Button Function  
Right roadside parking light on.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Left roadside parking light off.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
Switching off the roadside parking light:  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
178  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
4. "Pathway lighting"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
6. "OK"  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
Daytime driving lights  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
1. "CAR"  
4. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
4. Depending on the national-market version:  
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving  
lights, rear"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are switched on for a  
limited time.  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Pathway lighting  
Principle  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Switching pathway lighting on  
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly  
push the turn signal lever forward.  
▷
▷
Adaptive Light Control.  
Cornering light.  
Setting the duration  
1. "CAR"  
Activating  
2. "Settings"  
Press the button on the light switch.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
179  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Adaptive Light Control  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
General information  
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and  
other parameters, the light from the headlight  
follows the course of the road.  
General information  
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap-  
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo-  
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
Cornering light  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
Principle  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
1.  
Press the button on the light  
switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
180  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
Interruption of journey with activated Auto-  
matic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
driving continues.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
Functional requirements  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
181  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
The respective info label is located in or on  
the headlight and is visible from the outside or  
when the hood is open.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Laser high-beam headlights  
Principle  
The headlight range of the high-beam head-  
lights is increased and provides better illumi-  
nation of the road.  
Laser radiation.  
General information  
The laser high-beam headlights are integrated  
into the headlights and emit from there.  
Do not look into the beam.  
Laser class 2.  
When the high-beam headlights are switched-  
on, starting with a speed of approx.  
37 mph/60 km/h, the laser high-beam head-  
lights in the headlight are automatically  
switched on in addition to the LED high-beam  
headlights.  
Instrument lighting  
Functional requirement  
The parking lights or low-beam headlights  
must be switched on to set the brightness.  
Depending on the national-market version, ad-  
ditional information can be taken from the la-  
ser sign on the headlight.  
Setting the brightness  
Adjust the brightness with the  
knurled wheel.  
182  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Interior lighting  
Ambient light  
General information  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
Overview  
1. "CAR"  
Buttons in the vehicle  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Ambient lighting"  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
Interior lights  
Reading lights  
Selecting the color  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Turning interior lights on/off  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Color"  
Press the button.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
Setting the brightness  
1. "CAR"  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Press the button.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Brightness"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
183  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Dynamic light  
Individual actions, for example incoming calls  
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Setting the brightness  
1. "CAR"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Dynamic light"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"  
5. "Brightness"  
Dimmed while driving  
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Dimmed for night driving"  
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond  
Surround Sound System  
Principle  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
Brightness can be individually set.  
General information  
When the speakers are muted, the speaker  
lighting is turned off.  
Activating/deactivating speaker  
lighting  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"  
184  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
3
4
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
Front airbag, front passenger  
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest, lap,  
and head area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Knee airbag  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
185  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or  
other objects to the front seats that are not  
specifically suited for seats with integrated  
side airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Never modify either the individual compo-  
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.  
This also applies to steering wheel covers,  
the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
186  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 118.  
Warning  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat  
is occupied by measuring the human body's  
resistance.  
The front passenger airbags are activated or  
deactivated.  
General information  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
187  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
passenger's side are not ac-  
tivated.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
When transporting older children and adults,  
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-  
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the  
indicator light for the front passenger airbags  
illuminates.  
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate  
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-  
son of sufficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side  
are activated.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbags are activated and  
the indicator light goes out.  
Detected child restraint systems  
The system generally detects children seated  
in a child restraint system, particularly in child  
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the  
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-  
tured. After installing a child restraint system,  
make sure that the indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates  
that the child restraint system has been de-  
tected and the front passenger airbags are not  
activated.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
▷
Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-  
tem is to be installed on it.  
Rollover protection system  
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Principle  
No moisture in or on the seat.  
The rollover protection system is automatically  
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious  
accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex-  
cessively. The safety bars located behind the  
rear head restraints extend within fractions of  
a second.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
Supplementing the reinforced windshield  
frame, the rollover protection system further  
increases passenger safety.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-  
ther activated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether  
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
General information  
Do not place any objects on the covers of the  
rollover protection system.  
▷
The indicator light illuminates  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint  
system or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
188  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Overview  
Warning  
There can be damage or injuries when the  
rollover protection system is triggered. There  
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Make sure that the area of movement of  
the rollover protection system is clear.  
Covers of the rollover protection system.  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the  
system. If the system is not operational, the  
system might not trigger as intended even  
if there is an accident severe enough to war-  
rant it. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Have the vehicle checked, repaired, dis-  
assembled, and scrapped by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Intelligent Safety  
Principle  
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of  
the driver assistance systems.  
General information  
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,  
Intelligent Safety consists of one or more sys-  
tems that can help prevent the risk of imminent  
collision.  
Warning  
After triggering or damage, system function-  
ality is limited or not available anymore.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function, refer to page 191.  
▷
▷
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 194.  
After being triggered or damaged, have the  
vehicle checked and replaced by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified serv-  
ice center or repair shop.  
Intersection Collision Warning with city  
braking function, refer to page 196.  
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 199.  
▷
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 201.  
Warning  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 204.  
With an extended rollover protection system,  
the area of movement of the convertible top  
is limited. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. When the rollover pro-  
tection system is extended, do not move the  
convertible top.  
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 207.  
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 209.  
189  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Settings  
The following settings can be selected for In-  
telligent Safety systems:  
Warning  
▷
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated  
for the sub-functions, for instance setting  
for warning time.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety sys-  
tems are switched on according to the indi-  
vidual settings.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Intelligent Safety  
systems can be configured individually. The  
individual settings are activated and stored.  
As soon as a setting is changed on the  
menu, all settings of the menu are acti-  
vated.  
Warning  
▷
"ALL OFF": All Intelligent Safety systems  
are switched off.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Display  
Button Status  
Button illuminates green: all Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are switched  
on.  
Button illuminates orange: some  
Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off or currently unavailable.  
Overview  
Button does not illuminate: all Intel-  
ligent Safety systems are switched  
off.  
Button in the vehicle  
Switching Intelligent Safety systems  
on/off  
General information  
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati-  
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli-  
gent Safety systems activate according to the  
last setting.  
Intelligent Safety  
M Mode: depending on the selected program,  
Intelligent Safety systems are turned on or off.  
190  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Operation  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety  
system is displayed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
Driver Attention Camera in the instrument clus-  
ter captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi-  
tionally, the system checks for visual impair-  
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect  
the timing of the warnings.  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched  
off, all systems are now switched on.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Configure Intelligent  
Safety systems individually if required.  
Safety information  
Press the button repeatedly. The fol-  
lowing settings are switched between:  
Warning  
▷
▷
"ALL ON"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
"INDIVIDUAL"  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in-  
dividually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
"ALL OFF": The menu is selected. All  
Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.  
Forward Collision Warning  
with braking function  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function is a warning function that notifies the  
driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes  
automatically as necessary. In the event of an  
accident, the system helps by reducing impact  
speed.  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Sensors  
The system issues a two-phase warning of  
a possible risk of collision with vehicles at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The tim-  
ing of warnings may vary with the current driv-  
ing situation.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
Additional information:  
191  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Icon  
Measure  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning.  
Switching Forward Collision  
Warning on/off  
Brake and increase distance.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Prewarning  
This prewarning is provided, for instance when  
there is impending risk of a collision or the dis-  
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking  
as warranted.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Acute warning with brake function  
An acute warning is displayed in case of the  
imminent risk of a collision when the vehicle  
approaches another object at a high differen-  
tial speed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Actively intervene if an acute warning is given,  
e.g., apply brakes. Depending on the driving  
situation and the equipment version, the acute  
warning may be accompanied by a brief acti-  
vation of the braking system.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief  
activation of the braking system is omitted.  
"Late": only acute warnings are dis-  
played.  
If an acute warning is provided, the system  
may also provide assistance such as through  
automatic brake intervention when there is risk  
of collision.  
Warning with brake function  
Display  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prewarning.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display as applica-  
ble.  
Brake intervention  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
192  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system may also assist with brake inter-  
vention if there is a risk of collision.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
the brake intervention occurs as a brief activa-  
tion of the braking system. No automatic delay  
occurs.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
The braking intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force or by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily. The system is enabled as soon as  
the speed drops below this value again.  
System limits  
Safety information  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Warning  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
If the driving stability control systems are  
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC  
OFF.  
Detection range  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are,  
for example the warning time, the more warn-  
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also  
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-  
sponses.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
193  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Evasion Assistant  
Principle  
Sensors  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
General information  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes  
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-  
neuver is possible. Sensors monitor and detect  
the clearance around the vehicle. If the system  
detects sufficient free space alongside the ve-  
hicle, it helps the driver perform an evasive  
maneuver safely.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is  
on.  
Safety information  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 199.  
Warning  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function is switched on.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function, refer to page 191.  
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
the vehicle.  
Switching Evasion Assistant on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Warning with evasion support  
Warning  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warning  
light is shown on the instrument cluster and  
Head-up display.  
194  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection range  
Icon  
Measure  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning.  
Brake and increase distance.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for  
obstacles.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Warning light flashes red and a sig-  
nal sounds: acute warning for people,  
e.g., pedestrians.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for example:  
Acute warning with evasion support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, an acute warning is  
displayed if there is an immediate risk of colli-  
sion.  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The  
system is designed to provide assistance dur-  
ing evasive maneuvers when there is a risk of  
collision.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prewarning.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
System limits  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Safety information  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Warning  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
If the driving stability control systems are  
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC  
OFF.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
195  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Intersection Collision  
Warning with city braking  
function  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Principle  
The Intersection Collision Warning with city  
braking function is a warning function that  
helps prevent accidents with cross traffic at in-  
tersections and junctions. In the event of an  
accident, the system helps by reducing impact  
speed.  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the system warns the driver of a possible  
risk of collision and brakes automatically if nec-  
essary.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Vehicles that cross your driving direction can  
be detected by the system as soon as these  
vehicles enter into the detection range of the  
system.  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-  
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-  
fic is detected.  
The system issues a two-phase warning of  
a possible risk of collision with vehicles at  
speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The  
timing of warnings may vary with the current  
driving situation.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument  
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Ad-  
ditionally, the system checks for visual impair-  
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect  
the timing of the warnings.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
196  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Switching Intersection Collision  
Warning on/off  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning for risk of collision with  
vehicle crossing from the right.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for  
immediate risk of collision.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning for risk of collision with  
vehicle crossing from the left.  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for  
immediate risk of collision.  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning for risk of collision with  
vehicle from an undetectable direc-  
tion of travel.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning for  
immediate risk of collision.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Prewarning  
For example, a prewarning is displayed when  
a risk of collision with a crossing vehicle is de-  
tected.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
"Late": only acute warnings are dis-  
played.  
Intervene if a prewarning is issued, e.g., apply  
brakes.  
Warning with brake function  
Acute warning with brake function  
Display  
An acute warning is displayed in the event of  
an immediate risk of collision with a crossing  
vehicle.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display as applica-  
ble.  
If an acute warning is issued, brake and evade  
as necessary. If an acute warning is provided,  
the system may provide assistance such as  
through automatic brake intervention when  
there is risk of collision.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prewarning.  
197  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Brake intervention  
Detection range  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
The system may also assist with brake inter-  
vention if there is a risk of collision.  
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.  
The braking intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force or by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
The system’s ability to detect objects may be  
limited in some circumstances. Note the limi-  
tations of the detection range and functional  
limitations.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
System limits  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
Safety information  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
▷
▷
Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.  
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
If the driving stability control systems are  
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC  
OFF.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are,  
for example the warning time, the more warn-  
198  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also  
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-  
sponses.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Daytime Pedestrian  
Collision Mitigation  
Principle  
The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is  
a warning function that notifies the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists and brakes automatically as neces-  
sary. The system issues warnings for speeds  
that are common in towns and cities. In the  
event of an accident, the system helps by re-  
ducing impact speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Detection range  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The detection range in front of the vehicle is  
divided into two areas:  
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and  
left of the central area.  
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,  
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the  
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-  
trians who are located within the extended  
199  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
area only if they are moving in the direction of  
the central area.  
The braking intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force or by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
Switching Pedestrian Warning  
on/off  
System limits  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
Warning with brake function  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to pedestrians and cy-  
clists when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Display  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is shown  
on the instrument cluster and Head-up display  
as applicable.  
Detection range  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is-  
sued late.  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: Risk of immi-  
nent collision detected.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
Partially hidden persons.  
Intervene immediately by braking or making an  
evasive maneuver.  
Persons that are not detected as such be-  
cause of the viewing angle or contour.  
Brake intervention  
▷
▷
Persons outside of the detection range.  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Persons having a body size less than  
32 in/80 cm.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
If there is a risk of collision, the system may  
also assist with brake intervention.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
200  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate Do  
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a  
warning.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be restricted or not available  
in the following situations:  
▷
If the driving stability control systems are  
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
Lane departure warning  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
General information  
This camera-based system warns starting at a  
minimum speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by cameras behind  
the windshield.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warnings are issued by means of a steering  
wheel vibration.  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
Depending on the equipment version, if in the  
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane  
boundary is crossed, the system may inter-  
vene with a brief active steering intervention  
in addition to vibrating. The system thus helps  
keep the vehicle in the lane.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Safety information  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-  
ing road and traffic situations. There is a  
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic  
Additional information:  
201  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-  
tem is switched on. A lane boundary  
has been detected on at least one  
side of the vehicle and the system  
is ready to intervene. Warnings will  
be issued. The system can perform  
steering interventions.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
"Reduced": some warnings are sup-  
pressed depending on the situation,  
for instance when purposely driving over  
pathway lines in curves or with dynamic  
passing without a turn signal.  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
▷
"Off": no warnings are issued.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the  
instrument cluster.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
Warning function  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety  
systems.  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
Switching steering intervention on/off  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-  
tion and lane departure warning.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
202  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Steering intervention  
End of warning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: if, in the speed range up to  
130 mph/210 km/h a lane boundary is crossed,  
the system may intervene with a brief active  
steering intervention in addition to vibrating.  
The steering intervention supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane. The steer-  
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering  
wheel and can be manually overridden at any  
time. During an active steering intervention,  
the display in the instrument cluster will flash.  
For instance, the warning will be canceled in  
the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are not detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
System limits  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
Safety information  
When actively merging back to your own  
lane after passing.  
Warning  
Warning signal  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Depending on the equipment version: in the  
event of multiple active steering interventions  
by the system within 3 minutes without the  
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering inter-  
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-  
vention, a continuous warning will sound.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The warning signal and Check Control mes-  
sage are an encouragement to pay closer at-  
tention to the lane.  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
203  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the  
situations described above. The warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel vibrates.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Vehicles with Side Collision Warning: At  
speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, this sys-  
tem can intervene with brief, active steering  
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.  
The steering intervention occurs when a mini-  
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed  
is displayed on the control display in the menu  
for the steering intervention.  
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
Principle  
Safety information  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
the driver at different levels.  
General information  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
204  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Vehicles with steering intervention:  
switching steering intervention on/off  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-  
tion and lane departure warning.  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
For vehicles with steering intervention:  
cameras behind the windshield.  
Additional information:  
1. "CAR"  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the  
instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
Additional information:  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
Warning function  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
205  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Prewarning  
Upper speed limit  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
Acute warning  
If the turn signal is activated while a vehicle  
is in your hazard area, the steering wheel vi-  
brates briefly and the warning light in the exte-  
rior mirror flashes brightly.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or the turn signal has been  
deactivated.  
For vehicles with steering intervention:  
cameras, refer to page 35.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Vehicles with steering intervention  
When there is no response to the vibration  
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is  
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief  
active steering intervention. The steering inter-  
vention helps return the vehicle into the lane.  
The steering intervention can be noticed on  
the steering wheel and can be manually over-  
ridden at any time.  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
For vehicles with steering intervention, this in-  
tervention can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
System limits  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
Safety information  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
206  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Displaying warnings  
Safety information  
Depending on the selected warning settings,  
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can  
be displayed. However, there may also be an  
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-  
uations.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Side collision mitigation  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
General information  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next  
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the  
collision. For this purpose, the system issues  
a warning with a flashing LED in the exterior  
mirror and a vibrating steering wheel. If neces-  
sary, the system will carry out an active steer-  
ing intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
207  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-  
vention to be active.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Turning the side collision warning  
on/off  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Additional information:  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 189.  
Setting the Side Collision Warning  
Acute warning  
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel starts vibrating.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
If necessary, an active steering intervention is  
performed to prevent the collision and main-  
tain the vehicle within its own lane.  
The steering intervention can be noticed on  
the steering wheel and can be manually over-  
ridden at any time.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety  
systems.  
System limits  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the  
instrument cluster.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Additional information:  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
208  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
General information  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
209  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane keeping.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the system includes a  
lane change function.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by radar sensors on  
the sides at the rear.  
With lane change function: on motorways or  
motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-  
hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where  
possible. On other roads or with high traffic  
volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in  
the current lane.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Overview  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Parking brake  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant can be trig-  
gered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h  
up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
If equipped with Equipment  
Stop Assistant  
▷
With lane change function: lane changes  
are executed when the traffic situation al-  
lows.  
Principle  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer-  
gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the  
vehicle to a standstill.  
Briefly pull the parking brake switch to  
trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.  
General information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered  
automatically. The system can only be trig-  
gered manually by the occupants.  
210  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
With lane change function: releasing the  
switch may trigger an automatic lane  
change.  
Without lane change function:  
Icon  
Status  
When lane markings are detected,  
the system keeps the vehicle in the  
lane.  
The system will take control of the vehicle  
for a maximum of 2 minutes.  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
Lane keeping is briefly interrupted.  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Lane boundary driven over.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-  
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle  
throughout the entire process.  
When lane markings are detected,  
the system keeps the vehicle in the  
lane.  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. The system is still ac-  
tive.  
For instance, the system will be canceled in the  
following situations:  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: Hands not  
touching steering wheel. Interruption  
of lane keeping is imminent.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When steering.  
When flashing.  
When depressing the accelerator pedal.  
When switching off the hazard warning sys-  
tem.  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: Lane keeping  
is switched off.  
▷
▷
When canceling the Emergency Request.  
When switching the selector lever position  
at a standstill.  
System limits  
Use the system only in the event of a driver  
failure.  
▷
The parking brake switch is pressed.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-  
tem will carry out the following settings:  
The system cannot replace the driving per-  
formance of a driver who is fit to drive.  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
BMW Drive Recorder  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Status  
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
General information  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
211  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.  
▷
▷
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Recording type was selected.  
Recording time was selected.  
The function makes it possible to document  
the accident with the correspondingly set  
recording type.  
Manual storage of the recording.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated  
before the first use of the recording function.  
The function makes it possible to document  
traffic situations with the correspondingly  
set recording type.  
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. Accept Privacy Policy.  
4. "Settings"  
The assistance systems' cameras are used to  
record, e.g., Panorama View.  
Additionally, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
5. "Recording allowed"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
Time.  
Recording functions  
Vehicle speed.  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Automatic recording  
Recordings are saved automatically when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident.  
Data protection  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory  
regulations of the country in which the system  
is to be used. The user is responsible for the  
use of the system and compliance with respec-  
tive applicable regulations.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
Manual recording  
Using the button  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state  
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,  
the laws regarding use of the system should  
be verified at regular intervals, especially when  
frequently crossing borders.  
Press and hold this button.  
Via iDrive  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Start recording"  
To stop the recording: "Cancel".  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information  
about the system is required when handing off  
the vehicle.  
Recording can also be started by selecting the  
widget on the control display.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
212  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Camera selection"  
Recording playback and  
administration  
5. Select desired camera.  
Stored video recordings can be played back,  
exported and deleted.  
In case of an accident, the system switches  
automatically to "All" cameras.  
For your own safety, the video recording is  
only displayed on the control display up to ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market  
versions, the video recording is only displayed  
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-  
tor lever is in the P position.  
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their  
camera views are automatically selected.  
System limits  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not  
be possible to store recordings if the damage  
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply  
was interrupted.  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may  
not be possible to export recordings correctly.  
3. "Saved recordings"  
4. Select desired recording.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
If a camera change occurred during the record-  
ing, different segments of the video can be se-  
lected.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Settings  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
Recording type  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
4. "RECORDING TYPE"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Recording time  
1. "Apps"  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than  
automatic braking allows.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Cameras  
1. "Apps"  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by the au-  
tomatic brake function. Automatic braking is  
interrupted.  
2. "Drive Recorder"  
3. "Settings"  
213  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Canceling automatic braking  
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic  
braking in certain situations, for instance when  
making an evasive maneuver.  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
Depending on the equipment: attention  
of the driver through the Driver Attention  
Camera.  
Cancel automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
The system is active starting at ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a  
break recommendation.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Break recommendation  
Fatigue alert  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Principle  
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert-  
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-  
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The  
system recommends a break.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
Function  
The system is switched on each time drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
System limits  
System functionality may be limited. If the  
function is limited, either no warning may be  
issued or an unwarranted warning may be is-  
sued. The system function may be limited in  
the following situations, e.g.:  
After starting the trip, the system is trained to  
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-  
gue can be detected.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
214  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
215  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Drive-off assistant  
Antilock Braking System  
Principle  
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on  
uphill grades.  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake  
pedal.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off  
quickly.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each engine start.  
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
Malfunction  
In order to prevent rolling back when driving  
off, use the parking brake.  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
1.  
Pull and release switch before driving  
off.  
The parking brake is set.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to  
drive off.  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
216  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Icon Meaning  
M Menu  
"Chassis": programs of Adaptive M  
suspension, refer to page 276.  
Principle  
Buttons M1 or M2 on the steering wheel can be  
used to store individual settings for the vehicle  
and call them up again as needed.  
"Steering": programs of Servotronic, re-  
fer to page 220.  
"Brake": programs of brake, refer to  
page 221.  
General information  
"DSC": Dynamic Stability Control, refer  
to page 222, and M Dynamic Mode, re-  
fer to page 223.  
The buttons are preset with the correct config-  
uration for the vehicle and can be adjusted in-  
dividually.  
When the drive-ready state is switched on after  
the idle state, an efficient vehicle condition is  
active by default. The configuration via the but-  
tons is deactivated.  
"M xDrive": programs of M xDrive, refer  
to page 224.  
"Start/Stop": Auto Start/Stop function,  
refer to page 137.  
Safety information  
"Sound Control": Sound Control, refer  
to page 155.  
Warning  
Overview  
Depending on the setting, Dynamic Stability  
Control may be restricted or not available  
when the M1 or M2 button is activated. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of damage  
to property. Note the settings for Dynamic  
Stability Control in iDrive and take any nec-  
essary action. Modify your driving style and  
react, if necessary.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
M1  
M2  
Settings  
Button in the center console  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the settings  
for the following systems can be stored using  
the M1 or M2 buttons:  
Icon Meaning  
"Engine": programs of M Engine Dy-  
namics Control, refer to page 154.  
"Transmission": shift modes and Drive-  
logic programs.  
Drivelogic, refer to page 152.  
SETUP  
217  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Configuration  
Resetting the configuration  
Individual settings can be reset to default val-  
ues.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
"M menu"  
2.  
"M menu"  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Reset"  
5. Select the desired program.  
5. "Yes"  
The individual settings are stored for the con-  
figuration currently in use.  
To cancel resetting: "No"  
When M1 or M2 is active, any changes to the  
setting are immediately applied.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Using the button  
A reduced number of systems and functions  
can be adjusted directly.  
Icon illuminates: corresponding  
configuration is activated.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Turn the Controller to select the desired  
setting.  
Icon illuminates and additional  
lettering "Cannot be activated"  
appears: configuration cannot  
be activated due to the current  
driving situation.  
3. Press the Controller to change the desired  
program.  
Activating  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel:  
Reactivate configuration when  
the lettering is not illuminated.  
▷
Activate M1.  
M MODE  
▷
Activate M2.  
Principle  
The driving experience can be adjusted de-  
pending on the situation using various pro-  
grams.  
If DSC OFF or MDM is set under "Configure  
M1" or "Configure M2", a message is displayed  
on the instrument cluster. This message is  
confirmed by pressing the button again.  
General information  
The following programs are available:  
Deactivating  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
"ROAD"  
"SPORT"  
Depending on the equipment: "TRACK"  
218  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Programs  
ROAD  
Warning  
▷
All available Intelligent Safety systems are  
turned on.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
▷
All available driver assistance systems are  
active.  
SPORT  
The Intelligent Safety systems are switched on  
according to the individual settings.  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
systems are deactivated:  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-  
tion.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed Limit Assistant.  
Speed Limit Info with preview.  
Steering Assistant.  
Traffic Jam Assistant.  
Lane Change Assistant.  
Overview  
Activating a system will automatically switch to  
ROAD mode.  
Button in the vehicle  
Depending on the equipment: TRACK  
The Intelligent Safety systems are switched  
off.  
In addition to the deactivated systems in  
SPORT mode, the following systems are deac-  
tivated depending on vehicle equipment:  
▷
▷
Speed Limit Info with no-passing indicator.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function.  
M MODE  
▷
▷
▷
Evasion Assistant.  
Rear-end collision preparation.  
Hazard flashing with hard braking right be-  
fore standstill is deactivated.  
219  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Control display is switched off.  
Program  
Steering force tuning  
The functions of the entertainment system  
are switched off.  
"COMFORT" Low steering forces, good  
roadway feedback.  
"SPORT"  
High steering forces, maxi-  
mum roadway feedback.  
Selecting a program  
Press the button to switch between  
ROAD and SPORT.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment:  
To switch to TRACK mode, hold the button  
down until a message is displayed on the con-  
trol display. Confirm the message.  
Button in the vehicle  
Pressing the button again switches back to  
ROAD mode.  
Display  
The display changes according to the drive  
mode selected. The view can be configured  
individually.  
SETUP  
Servotronic  
Selecting a program  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power  
steering function.  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the de-  
sired program on the control display.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord-  
ing to the program, so that a firm, sporty  
feel or a comfortable steering response is con-  
veyed.  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Steering"  
"M menu"  
General information  
The system offers several different steering  
force tunings.  
5. Select the desired program.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
220  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
SETUP  
Selecting a program  
Using the button  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Press the button and select the de-  
sired program on the control display.  
When the display of the widget in the  
instrument cluster for M SETUP is ac-  
tivated, the selected program is dis-  
played.  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
Additional information:  
Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 159.  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Brake"  
"M menu"  
Brake  
5. Select the desired program.  
Principle  
The sensitivity of the brake pedal motions to  
the braking response can be adjusted.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
General information  
The system offers different levels of brake sen-  
sitivities:  
▷
Program  
Brake response behavior  
▷
"COMFORT" Comfortable.  
"SPORT"  
Direct.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display of the widget in the  
instrument cluster for M SETUP is ac-  
tivated, the selected program is dis-  
played.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Additional information:  
Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 159.  
221  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep  
the vehicle on a steady course by reducing  
drive power and by brake intervention on indi-  
vidual wheels.  
General information  
The Dynamic Stability Control will detect, e.g.,  
the following unstable driving conditions:  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
DSC OFF  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
Deactivating/activating the Dynamic  
Stability Control  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Deactivating the system  
Hold the button down until DSC OFF  
is displayed in the instrument cluster  
and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu-  
minated.  
Warning  
M xDrive appears on the control display. The  
required program can be selected.  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-  
ical driving situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Drive with  
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control.  
Additional information:  
M xDrive, refer to page 224.  
Activating the system  
Press the button.  
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator  
light turn off.  
222  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
To support driving stability, reactivate the Dy-  
namic Stability Control.  
Display  
In the instrument cluster  
If the Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,  
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabi-  
lizing interventions are carried out only to a  
reduced extent. There is a risk of accident, in-  
jury, or property damage. Adjust driving style  
to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traf-  
fic closely and actively intervene where ap-  
propriate Do not jerk the steering wheel in  
response to a warning.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the drive and  
brake power.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has failed.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
M Dynamic Mode  
Principle  
M Dynamic Mode allows a ride with high longi-  
tudinal and lateral acceleration but with limited  
driving stability.  
Only in the absolute limit range does the sys-  
tem intervene for stabilization by reducing the  
engine power and by brake interventions on  
the wheels. In this driving condition, additional  
steering corrections may be necessary.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active  
M xDrive mode is: "4WD SPORT" when M Dy-  
namic Mode is activated.  
Activate/deactivate  
Using the button  
Press the button.  
In the following exceptional situations, it may  
be expedient to briefly activate M Dynamic  
Mode:  
Via iDrive  
▷
When rocking the vehicle free from deep  
snow or driving off from loose ground.  
It is possible to configure M Dynamic Mode for  
buttons M1 or M2.  
▷
With an increased need for dynamics or  
longitudinal acceleration, for instance when  
driving on a race track.  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
"M menu"  
223  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "DSC"  
distributes the drive forces to the front and rear  
axles as demanded by the driving situation  
and road condition.  
5. "MDM"  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
General information  
There arethree M xDrive programs available  
when the DSC Dynamic Stability Control is de-  
activated.  
▷
▷
Overview  
A message appears in the instrument cluster.  
This message is confirmed by pressing the  
button again.  
Button in the vehicle  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Display active and indicator  
light illuminates:  
M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
SETUP  
Dynamic Stability Control  
warning light also flashes:  
Programs  
M Dynamic Mode controls the  
driving and brake power.  
Program  
Distribution of driving forces  
"4WD"  
Front and rear axles.  
Indicator and warning lights il-  
luminate:  
"4WD  
SPORT"  
Front and rear axles.  
Main component, rear axle.  
The M Dynamic Mode or the  
Dynamic Stability Control has  
malfunctioned.  
"2WD"  
Rear axle.  
A program is activated automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
M xDrive  
▷
▷
▷
When the drive-ready state is switched on:  
"4WD".  
Principle  
When the M Dynamic Mode is activated:  
"4WD SPORT".  
M xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the  
vehicle. The M xDrive and the Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control work together to optimize the trac-  
tion and driving dynamics. M xDrive variably  
When the Dynamic Stability Control is acti-  
vated: "4WD".  
224  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Selecting a program  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
General information  
Changing programs in dynamic driving situa-  
tions is not possible.  
The indicator light is illumi-  
nated and 4WD appears in the  
instrument cluster:  
Using the button  
"4WD" is activated.  
Press the button and select the de-  
sired program on the control display.  
The indicator light is illumi-  
nated and 4WD Sport appears  
in the instrument cluster:  
Via iDrive  
"4WD SPORT" is activated.  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
The indicator lights are illumi-  
nated and 2WD appears in the  
instrument cluster:  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
"M menu"  
"2WD" is activated.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. If necessary, deactivate the Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control.  
Active M differential  
5.  
"M xDrive"  
6. Select the desired program.  
The active M differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial depending on the driving situation. This  
prevents an individual rear wheel from spin-  
ning even when the Dynamic Stability Control  
is turned off and in M Dynamic Mode, and thus  
enables optimum traction in all driving situa-  
tions.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
▷
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
▷
225  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Without a navigation system, the system is  
subject to limitations imposed by technology.  
Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-  
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to  
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are  
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic  
signs are always displayed.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Speed Limit Info  
Safety information  
Speed Limit Info  
Warning  
Principle  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
Overview  
Sensors  
With the navigation system, the system takes  
into account the information stored in the nav-  
igation system and also displays speed limits  
present on routes without signs.  
The system is controlled by cameras behind  
the windshield.  
Additional information:  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
226  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displaying Speed Limit Info  
Display  
General information  
Speed Limit Info  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed  
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the in-  
strument cluster or via iDrive.  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the na-  
tional-market version, it  
is possible to switch  
between the units of  
measurement.  
Activating  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Speed limits"  
7. "Show current limit"  
Without a navigation  
system the traffic sig-  
nals are grayed out  
after curves or longer  
stretches of distance  
traveled.  
No data for the current  
speed limit available.  
The displays may vary  
depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
Depending on the  
equipment, Speed Limit  
Info not available.  
Warning signals  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
227  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Principle  
The warning that is issued when a speed limit  
is exceeded may depend on the Speed Limit  
Assistant settings.  
The system can be used to set a speed limit,  
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-  
ceeding speed limits.  
Additional information:  
General information  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 241.  
The system can limit the speed, starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven  
at any speed below the set speed limit.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Overview  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Button Function  
System on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
For traffic signs that are fully or partially  
concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Rocker switch:  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Changing the speed limit.  
In areas not covered by the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Operation  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
The current speed is adopted as the speed  
limit.  
▷
▷
▷
When the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is  
stationary or driving at low speeds, the speed  
limit is set to 20 mph/30 km/h.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the  
corresponding speed.  
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic  
Stability Control is switched on as necessary.  
228  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Exceeding the speed limit  
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed  
limit, a warning is issued.  
The system switches off automatically in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.  
When Cruise Control is switched on.  
When activating some programs.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down  
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
The displays turn off.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-  
vated.  
Interrupting  
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the  
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Changing the speed limit  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the  
indicator light in the instrument clus-  
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is  
greater than the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-  
ally, a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-  
low the current vehicle speed, the signal  
sounds after some time.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-  
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator  
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-  
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,  
the vehicle is not actively braked.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
When the speed limit is set during a trip to  
a value below the current speed, the vehicle  
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.  
The current speed can also be stored by  
pressing a button:  
229  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
No marking: system is  
switched off.  
Indicator light  
Warning  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light illuminates: the  
system is switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only use the system if driving at  
constant speed is possible.  
Cruise Control  
Warning  
Principle  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions.  
Button Function  
Cruise control on/off.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
230  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
Button Function  
Interrupt cruise control.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While M Dynamic Mode is activated or Dy-  
namic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Switching cruise control on/off  
Adjusting the speed  
Turning on  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
Turning off  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
Press the button.  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the button.  
231  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
Changing the speed  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Press the button with the system in-  
terrupted.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
The maximum speed that can be set de-  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or  
decelerates without pressure on the accel-  
erator pedal.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
No indicator light: system is switched  
off.  
Continuing cruise control  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
232  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Safety information  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
Warning  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
System limits  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Active Cruise Control with  
Stop&Go function  
Principle  
Warning  
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and  
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions.  
233  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Button Function  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Increase the distance.  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
Reduce distance.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Overview  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
With Steering Assistant:  
Cruise control on/off.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
With Steering Assistant:  
Select function.  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Cruise control on/off.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
Store current speed.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
With Steering Assistant:  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
234  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Turning on/off and interrupting  
cruise control  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
With Steering Assistant: Assisted  
Driving Mode  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
General information  
This button is used to switch the con-  
figured function on and off.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The button can be used to set the pri-  
marily used function.  
Turning off  
To switch off the system while stationary, step  
on brake pedal at the same time.  
Setting the function  
Press the button on the steering wheel:  
With Steering Assistant.  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired  
function is selected in the toolbar. The  
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed  
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
Without Steering Assistant.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Icon  
Function  
Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the button on the steering  
wheel:  
Depending on the equipment version,  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
and Steering Assistant.  
With Steering Assistant.  
Without Steering Assistant.  
If interrupting the system while stationary,  
press on the brake pedal at the same time.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
Turning on  
With Steering Assistant:  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
wheel.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
2.  
If necessary, set the cruise control.  
While M Dynamic Mode is enabled or Dy-  
namic Stability Control is disabled.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
235  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Changing the speed  
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat  
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is  
opened.  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Adjusting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
Adjusting the distance  
Safety information  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be  
activated.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Be aware of the surround-  
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the  
distance to the traffic and weather conditions  
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,  
possibly by braking.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
Press the button.  
236  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button on the steering wheel with  
the system interrupted:  
Reducing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
With Steering Assistant.  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
Without Steering Assistant.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
Increasing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: the system can be set so that  
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-  
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-  
tem takes into account the traffic situation and  
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Switching Cruise Control without Distance  
Control off and on:  
Continuing cruise control  
Warning  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
With Steering Assistant: switch on Distance  
Control:  
Press the button.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance  
Control:  
237  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
▷
▷
Press the button.  
Press the button.  
Distance 3  
After changing, a Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Distance 4  
This value is set automatically  
after the system is switched  
on.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
No distance control display, as  
the accelerator pedal is being  
pressed.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
Detected vehicle  
Icon  
Description  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
Green icon:  
Vehicle has been detected  
ahead of you.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Distance to vehicle ahead of you  
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you  
is shown.  
When the distance to the detected vehicle in-  
creases, the vehicle icon in the distance display  
will move away.  
Icon  
Description  
If necessary, drive off on your own such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the rocker switch.  
Distance 1  
Distance 2  
238  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Alternative icon indicators  
Icon  
Description  
Icon  
Description  
White indicator light:  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
No distance control display, as the  
accelerator pedal is being pressed.  
No indicator light: system is  
switched off.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle icon flashes:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
Conditions are not adequate  
for the system to work.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
The system was deactivated  
but applies the brakes until  
you actively resume control by  
pressing on the brake pedal or  
accelerator pedal.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Vehicle in front drove off.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
System interrupted.  
The vehicle icon and distance  
bars flash red and an acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
Brake and make an evasive  
maneuver, if necessary.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
System interrupted.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Assisted Driving View  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the  
central display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Set speed  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
239  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national availability, for red traffic lights.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
For oncoming traffic.  
▷
▷
Active Cruise Control switched off.  
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 174.  
Distance too short.  
Merging vehicles  
▷
▷
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Detection range  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
240  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cornering  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-  
tion.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
Safety information  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
241  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
Warning  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a driver assistance  
system are activated.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Icon  
Function  
Depending on the equipment version,  
the indicator light illuminates green,  
together with the icon for a speed  
control system:  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied  
manually for the displayed system.  
Button Function  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Rocker switch:  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Speed limits"  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually for the active driver assistance system.  
7. Select the desired setting:  
When the SET icon illuminates, press  
the button.  
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the  
national-market version: current and up-  
coming speed limits are displayed in  
the instrument cluster without being ap-  
plied.  
242  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Speed adjustment  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
Principle  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
Adjustment  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
You can configure a speed adaptation for all  
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-  
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust  
speed to route"  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1. "CAR"  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
2. "Settings"  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. To perform the desired setting:  
Upcoming speed limits can only be accepted  
for the Active Cruise Control.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for  
the speed adaptation that affects all  
speeds.  
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-  
activate additional speed adaptation.  
▷
With wintry road conditions.  
Additional information:  
"Adjust speed limits": With additional  
speed adjustment activated, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,  
refer to page 228.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 35.  
Adapting to route  
Steering Assistant  
Principle  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system can be configured so that the vehicle  
adapts the speed automatically to the route.  
Principle  
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle  
in the lane. For this purpose, the system ex-  
ecutes supporting steering movements, for in-  
stance when cornering.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations as necessary:  
243  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients  
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-  
cles in front.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Sufficient lane width.  
Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane  
boundary on both sides is detected.  
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
▷
Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane  
boundary on both sides or a vehicle driving  
ahead is detected.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
Wide curves.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Drive in the center of the lane.  
Turn signal switched off.  
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control active.  
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function on.  
▷
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation on.  
Side Collision Warning active.  
Overview  
Turning on/off  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Assisted Driving Mode  
General information  
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam  
Assistant on/off.  
This button is used to switch the con-  
figured function on and off.  
Switch function on.  
The button can be used to set the pri-  
marily used function.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Setting the function  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired  
function is selected in the toolbar. The  
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed  
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
244  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Interrupting automatically  
Icon  
Function  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the  
following situations:  
Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
▷
▷
▷
At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.  
When the steering wheel is released.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
and Steering Assistant.  
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
When the turn signal is switched on.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
Turning on  
If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-  
tain period of time and no vehicle is driving  
ahead.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
▷
The Active Cruise Control is interrupted.  
2.  
Adjust the Steering Assistant if  
necessary.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
The system is active.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-  
destrian Collision Mitigation system and the  
Side Collision Warning are activated.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
System is on standby.  
Turning off  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
The indicator goes out.  
The system does not perform supportive  
steering wheel movements.  
Warning light flashes yellow:  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
The steering wheel vibrates where  
applicable.  
245  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Description  
Icon  
Icon  
Description  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal may sound:  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
System interruption is imminent.  
Indicator light illuminates  
green:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version: The warning  
light flashes or illuminates red. A sig-  
nal sounds:  
The system is activated.  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment: Warning light flashes  
yellow:  
The system is switched off.  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
A lane boundary has been  
crossed.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
The steering wheel vibrates  
where applicable.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Warning light illuminates yel-  
low and acoustic signal may  
sound:  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. System interruption is immi-  
nent.  
System interruption is immi-  
nent.  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market ver-  
sion: The warning light flashes  
or illuminates red. A signal  
sounds:  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the  
central display area of the instrument cluster.  
The system is switched off.  
Green steering wheel icon and  
lane boundary icon:  
Additional information:  
The system supports the driver  
in keeping the vehicle within  
the lane.  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
Alternative icon indicators  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and  
are displayed as follows:  
246  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Icon  
Description  
All system information can also be displayed in  
the Head-up display.  
Yellow steering wheel icon:  
The hands are not grasping  
the steering wheel. The system  
is still active.  
System limits  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaning-  
fully used in certain situations, e.g., while tow-  
ing a trailer.  
Red steering wheel icon and a  
signal sounds:  
The hands are not grasping  
the steering wheel. System in-  
terruption is imminent.  
Safety information  
It is possible that the system  
will not execute any supporting  
steering movements.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
With Active Cruise Control, the  
system may reduce the speed.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-  
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-  
ment cluster:  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
▷
▷
Yellow: system interruption is imminent.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
The steering wheel displays can be switched  
on/off if required.  
Narrow lanes  
When driving within narrow lanes, the system  
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Light elements"  
247  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In construction areas.  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment, with auto-  
matic formation of emergency lanes.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
▷
Within city limits.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-  
tant apply.  
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
▷
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Functional requirements  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering  
Assistant are fulfilled.  
Functional requirements, refer to page 244.  
The Steering Assistant is active.  
▷
▷
The function is only available on certain  
street types, e.g. freeways.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or  
cyclists.  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide  
their vehicle through traffic jams.  
▷
▷
Sufficient lane width.  
Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead  
are detected.  
Supporting steering movements take place  
without the driver actively steering.  
▷
▷
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the Steering  
Assistant.  
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Safety information  
Turning on  
Warning  
As soon as all functional requirements  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
are met, an additional icon for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on  
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at  
the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
with the button on the steering wheel.  
The icon for Assisted Driving Mode Plus is  
shown in green.  
248  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.  
Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is  
shown in green.  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
System limits  
General information  
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-  
ply.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Additional information:  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Driver Attention Camera  
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-  
tem apply.  
Indicator light white: system is ready.  
Additional information:  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 62.  
Alternative symbol indicators  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and  
are displayed as follows:  
Lane Change Assistant  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when  
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the Steering  
Assistant.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-  
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-  
ment cluster:  
249  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
A supporting steering movement in the re-  
quired direction can be detected a short  
time later.  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-  
tant apply.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering  
Assistant are fulfilled.  
Functional requirements, refer to page 244.  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-  
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-  
ing traffic such as crash barriers.  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction.  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Maximum speed approx. 110 mph,  
180 km/h.  
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Icon  
Description  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Switch lane change assist on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Green arrow icon for lane-changing.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Steering Assistance"  
6. "Automatic Lane Change"  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Gray line for lane marking on the ap-  
propriate side.  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
Depending on the national-market  
version:  
2. Press the turn signal lever in the desired  
direction to the resistance point.  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.  
Lane change not possible; functional  
requirements not met.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
250  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the  
Additional information:  
central display area of the instrument cluster.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 243.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 158.  
Parking assistance systems  
Alternative symbol indicators  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and  
are displayed as follows:  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Icon  
Description  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Additional information:  
Gray line for lane marking on  
the appropriate side.  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Green arrow icon for lane-  
changing.  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 254.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
▷
▷
Side protection, refer to page 255.  
Rearview camera without Surround View,  
refer to page 256.  
Green steering wheel icon.  
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 259.  
Gray line for lane marking on  
the appropriate side.  
▷
▷
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 263.  
No arrow icon for lane-chang-  
ing on the display.  
Surround View with rearview camera, refer  
to page 265.  
The system detected the lane  
change request. Lane change  
not currently possible.  
▷
▷
▷
Panorama View, refer to page 270.  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 274.  
Depending on the national-  
market version:  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Park Distance Control  
Gray line for lane marking on  
the appropriate side.  
Principle  
Gray arrow icon for lane-  
changing.  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Lane change not possible;  
functional requirements not  
met.  
Depending on the equipment, obstacles that  
are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors  
may also be reported by the side protection.  
System limits  
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-  
ply.  
251  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Overview  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
Button in the vehicle  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
Safety information  
Park assistance button  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic  
sensors on the side.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Warning  
Turning on/off  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
Turning on automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
▷
With the engine running, when selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
▷
Depending on the equipment version: while  
approaching detected obstacles at a speed  
lower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The  
activation distance depends on the situa-  
tion in question.  
You may switch automatic activation when ob-  
stacles are detected on and off.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
252  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound.  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"  
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"  
The intermittent tone and continuous tone are  
switched off if the selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
Depending on equipment, an additional cam-  
era view is also switched on.  
Depending on design version, the intermittent  
tone is switched off after a short time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Automatic deactivation during forward  
travel  
The system switches off when a certain dis-  
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Volume  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
The volume of the Park Distance Control  
acoustic signals can be adjusted.  
Switching on/off manually  
1. "CAR"  
Press the park assistance button.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Volume PDC signal"  
6. Set the desired value.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
The rearview camera image is displayed if the  
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the  
park assistance button.  
Visual warning  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-  
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re-  
verse gear is engaged.  
Warning  
Signal tones  
General information  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. If, for example, an  
object is detected at the front left of the vehi-  
cle, a signal tone sounds from the front left  
speaker.  
The approach of the vehicle to an object is  
shown on the control display. Objects that are  
farther away are already displayed on the con-  
trol display before a signal sounds.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals.  
The display appears as soon as the Park Dis-  
tance Control is activated.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
The sensor detection range is shown in the  
colors green, yellow, and red when obstacles  
are detected there.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, with a distance  
253  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Pathway lines are faded in for better estima-  
tion of the space required.  
sensors before or after a continuous tone  
sounds.  
When the image of the rearview camera is dis-  
played, you can switch to the Park Distance  
Control or to a different view with obstacle  
markings if necessary:  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.  
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"  
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip-  
ment, you will be warned in the Park Distance  
Control display against vehicles approaching in  
the front or rear from the side.  
Malfunction  
A white icon appears and the sen-  
sor detection range is shown by the  
shaded area on the control display.  
Additional information:  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
System limits  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Principle  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention.  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can move into the blind area of the  
254  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant.  
System limits  
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance  
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant  
apply.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive  
where applicable.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Side protection  
Principle  
The side protection warns of obstacles on the  
side of the vehicle.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
General information  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Safety information  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 259.  
Warning  
Temporary switching off  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
The Park Distance Control brake function can  
be temporarily switched off:  
Confirm the message on the control display.  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will oc-  
cur.  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
1. "CAR"  
Additional information:  
2. "Settings"  
255  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Without Surround View:  
rearview camera  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 259.  
Principle  
Display  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Additionally, assistance functions can be  
shown in the display, e.g., help lines.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
Gray marks, hatched area: no obstacles  
were detected.  
No marks, black area: the area next to the  
vehicle was not yet captured.  
Limits of the side protection  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
Overview  
Depending on the vehicle equipment:  
button in the vehicle  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,  
the marks are shown in black after a certain  
time. The area next to the vehicle must be  
newly captured.  
In addition, the limits of the systems of the  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant apply.  
Park assistance button  
256  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
ited by protruding cargo, a rear-mounted  
luggage rack, or a trailer.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Display on the control display  
▷
Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
Toolbars  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The assistance functions can be activated  
manually via the toolbars on the sides of the  
control display.  
Turning on/off  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
Turning on automatically  
The system is switched on automatically if se-  
lector lever position R is engaged when the  
engine is running.  
2. With corresponding equipment:  
"Camera image"  
3.  
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
Pathway lines and turning circle lines  
are displayed.  
Automatic deactivation during forward  
travel  
▷
"Obstacle mark.".  
The system switches off when a certain dis-  
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.  
Depending on the equipment, the ob-  
stacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are displayed by marks.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
More than one assistance function can be ac-  
tive at the same time.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment:  
switching on/off manually  
Parking aid lines  
Press the park assistance button.  
General information  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
Additional assistance functions can be shown  
in the camera image on the control display.  
The parking assistance functions are shown  
on the control display.  
More than one assistance function can be ac-  
tive at the same time.  
Switching the view via iDrive  
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,  
change the view via iDrive:  
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.  
2.  
"Rear view camera"  
The rearview camera image is displayed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The trunk lid is fully closed.  
▷
Keep the camera's detection range free.  
The camera's detection range can be lim-  
257  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Pathway lines  
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Turning circle lines  
Depending on the equipment, obstacles be-  
hind the vehicle are detected by the Park Dis-  
tance Control sensors.  
Obstacle markings can be faded into the im-  
age of the rearview camera.  
The colored steps of the obstacle markings  
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.  
Setting brightness and contrast  
With the rearview camera switched on:  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
Turning circle lines show the course of the  
smallest possible turning radius on a level  
road.  
2.  
"Camera image"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
258  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When parking parallel to the road, parallel  
parking.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
When reverse parking perpendicular to the  
road, perpendicular parking. The system  
orients itself with the middle of the parking  
space.  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
Deactivated camera  
When the camera is deactivated, for instance  
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is  
displayed hatched in gray.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
General information  
Operating principle  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
Depending on the equipment, some assis-  
tance functions also take into account data  
from the Park Distance Control.  
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control  
chapter.  
Parking.  
System status and instructions on required ac-  
tions are displayed on the control display.  
The objects displayed on the control display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-  
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-  
play.  
Parking space search  
Parking space search is always active when-  
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and  
straight, even if the system is deactivated.  
When the system is deactivated, the displays  
on the control display are shown in gray.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
Principle  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated and the parking space search is active.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the  
driver in the following situations:  
Control display shows suitable parking spaces  
at the edge of the road next to the vehicle icon.  
When Automatic Parking Assistant is active,  
259  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
In addition, the safety instructions of the Park  
Distance Control apply.  
If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly  
detected, the system automatically adjusts the  
suitable parking method. In the case of parking  
spaces suitable for parallel and diagonal park-  
ing, a selection menu is displayed. In this case,  
the desired parking method must be selected  
manually.  
Additional information:  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates  
the best possible parking line and takes control  
of the following functions during the parking  
operation:  
▷
▷
▷
Steering.  
Acceleration and braking.  
Changing gears.  
Park assistance button  
The parking operation is automatic.  
Sensors  
Safety information  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional requirements  
For the measurement of parking  
spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
260  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m  
Switching on via iDrive  
The display of the rearview camera or the view  
of the Park Distance Control must be active.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
1. Move the Controller to the right.  
2. Activate the Automatic Parking Assistant  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
on the control display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m  
Turning off  
The system can be switched off manually:  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED goes out.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must  
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical  
limitations, the system is only able to ap-  
proximate the depth of perpendicular park-  
ing spaces.  
Status of the system  
Icon  
Meaning  
Gray: the system is not available.  
White: the system is available but  
not activated.  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and trunk lid are closed.  
System is activated.  
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
Parking space search is active.  
Turning on/turning off  
The parking operation is active. The  
system takes over the steering.  
Switching on with the button  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED illuminates.  
Turning the acoustic signal for  
suitable parking spaces on/off  
1. "CAR"  
The current status of the parking space search  
is indicated on the control display.  
2. "Settings"  
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated  
automatically.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Automatic Parking"  
Switching on with reverse gear  
1. Shift into reverse.  
6. "Alert if parking space detected"  
The current status of the parking space  
search is indicated on the control display.  
Acoustic signals of the Park  
Distance Control  
2. If necessary, activate:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent tone for Park Distance Control  
sounds during an automatic parking operation.  
261  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
A continuous tone sounds when the distance  
to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in-  
ches/20 cm.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system is interrupted automatically in the  
following situations:  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
1. For the parking space search, drive past  
parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of max.  
5 ft/1.5 m.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
The parking space search is activated.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display.  
The Park Distance Control indicates distan-  
ces that are too small.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
2. Engage reverse or press the Park Assist  
key.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
3. Select the suggested parking space for the  
parking maneuver on the control display.  
The turn signal opposite to the desired  
parking side is switched on.  
The parking operation is active. The sys-  
tem takes over the steering.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the trunk lid is open.  
If doors are open.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
When setting the parking brake.  
During acceleration.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
The brake pedal remains depressed for  
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display.  
▷
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Continuing the parking operation  
An interrupted parking operation can be con-  
tinued, if needed.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter-  
rupted at any time:  
Reactivate the Automatic Parking Assistant  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Press the park assistance button.  
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the  
control display.  
262  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-  
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Back-up assistant  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps the driver when  
reversing, e.g., when driving out of tight or un-  
clear parking or road situations.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For parking spaces that are only marked  
with lines on the ground. The system ori-  
ents itself according to objects.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
covered can be driven back with automated  
steering.  
▷
For diagonal parking spaces.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
General information  
The system takes control of the steering when  
driving in reverse along the stored route.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
The driver controls driving the vehicle via ac-  
celerator pedal and brake.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The Back-up Assistant uses the operating ele-  
ments and sensors of the Park Distance Con-  
trol and the Automatic Parking Assistant.  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 259.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
263  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel  
Safety information  
and carefully drive off using the accelerator  
pedal and the brake.  
Warning  
When driving in reverse, pay attention to  
the vehicle's surroundings, and if you en-  
counter an obstacle, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
6. Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to a forward gear.  
At the end of the stored distance travelled,  
a signal will sound and a request will be  
displayed, also with the instruction to take  
control of the vehicle.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 259.  
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:  
"Back-up Assistant"  
Press the button.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
▷
▷
A maximum of 165 ft/50 meters are stored.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/36 km/h.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Press the park assistance button or shift  
into reverse gear when the vehicle is  
stationary and the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
▷
When engaging a forward gear.  
During activation or intervention by driving  
control systems or assist systems.  
▷
▷
After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
The vehicle leaves the stored lane when re-  
versing, for instance at maximum steering  
angle.  
2. Move the Controller to the right.  
3. "Back-up Assistant"  
The system takes over the steering.  
▷
The view on the control display is overlaid  
with messages such as incoming calls.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play where required.  
264  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The following camera perspectives can be dis-  
played:  
System limits  
▷
When you reach normal road traffic or if you  
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately  
and take over control of the vehicle.  
▷
The automatic camera perspective auto-  
matically shows the appropriate perspec-  
tive according to the respective driving sit-  
uation.  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
The rearview camera shows the areas be-  
hind the vehicle.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warn-  
ing is issued and the function may be can-  
celed.  
The flank view on the right and left shows  
the areas on the sides of the vehicle.  
▷
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with  
major steering-wheel angles, the function  
of the system will be limited for the return  
trip.  
The free camera perspective, which can be  
moved via iDrive, shows defined perspec-  
tives on a circular path.  
▷
The Panorama View shows crossing traffic,  
depending on the gear currently engaged.  
In addition, the limits of the systems of the  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic  
Parking Assistant apply.  
Safety information  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents or inclines.  
Surround View  
Overview  
Principle  
Buttons in the vehicle  
The Surround View uses various vehicle cam-  
eras, for instance, a rearview camera and front  
camera to assist with parking and maneuver-  
ing. Depending on the view, the vehicle's sur-  
roundings or a part of it is depicted on the con-  
trol display.  
General information  
Several cameras capture the area from differ-  
ent selectable perspectives.  
265  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Park assistance button  
Panorama View  
Display on the control display  
Overview  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
1
Toolbar, left  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Camera image  
Side view  
Turning on/off  
Automatic camera perspective  
Movable unobstructed camera perspective  
Toolbar, right  
Turning on automatically  
The system is switched on automatically if se-  
lector lever position R is engaged when the  
engine is running.  
Rearview camera  
Selection window  
The camera perspective suitable for the re-  
spective driving situation is displayed.  
Toolbar on the left  
The left toolbar can be used for the direct se-  
lection of various views via iDrive. Move the  
Controller to the left, if needed.  
Additional information:  
Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to  
page 252.  
▷
▷
▷
"Parking": around the vehicle.  
"3D view": available camera.  
"Car wash".  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
Side view  
The side view can be selected for the right or  
left vehicle side.  
Depending on the equipment version, the rear-  
view camera cannot be switched off when the  
reverse gear is engaged.  
This view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
Automatic deactivation during forward  
travel  
The system switches off when a certain dis-  
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.  
The side view looks from rear to front and, in  
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-  
sible obstacles.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
266  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
"Obstacle mark.".  
"Settings": apply settings, for instance  
Automatic camera perspective  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction.  
▷
to use the activation points for Panorama  
View.  
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-  
ing situation.  
Rearview camera  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
or at the rear behind the bumper or, if neces-  
sary, changes to a side view.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a fixed perspective of the  
rearview camera. If necessary, manually se-  
lect the automatic camera perspective when  
reverse gear is engaged. The automatic cam-  
era perspective will be retained for the current  
parking operation.  
Selection window  
The individual camera perspectives can be se-  
lected in the selection window via iDrive.  
Parking aid lines  
General information  
Additional assistance functions can be shown  
in the camera image on the control display.  
Movable unobstructed camera  
perspective  
With selection of the movable camera perspec-  
tive, a circle appears on the control display.  
More than one assistance function can be ac-  
tive at the same time.  
By turning the Controller or via touch function,  
specified perspectives on the circle can be se-  
lected.  
Pathway lines  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon.  
To leave the function, move the Controller  
sideways and select another camera view.  
Toolbar on the right  
Assistance functions can be activated and  
settings can be entered via the right toolbar  
via iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if  
needed.  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
▷
▷
▷
"Autom. Parking".  
"Back-up Assistant".  
"Camera image":  
"Brightness".  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
▷
▷
"Contrast".  
267  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Turning circle lines  
The colored steps of the obstacle markings  
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.  
Car wash view  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
Turning circle lines show the course of the  
smallest possible turning radius on a level  
road.  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's  
own track.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
Side protection  
Principle  
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Display  
Obstacle marking  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by  
the Park Distance Control sensors.  
▷
▷
No marks: no obstacles were detected.  
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam-  
era image.  
268  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Limits of the side protection  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
Setting brightness and contrast  
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with  
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2.  
"Camera image"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Door opening angle  
Principle  
Functional limitations  
If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround  
View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
In poor light.  
The system does not provide a warning of ap-  
proaching road users.  
In case of soiled cameras.  
With a door open.  
With the trunk lid open.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Display  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P. As soon  
as the vehicle begins moving, the opening an-  
gles are replaced by parking aid lines.  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Non-visible areas  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
Limits of the display  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Even if the icons for the door opening angles  
do not cross other objects on the control dis-  
play, the following needs to be noted when  
parking next to other objects:  
Some assistance functions also take into con-  
sideration data from the Park Distance Control.  
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control  
chapter.  
269  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The objects displayed on the control display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-  
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-  
play.  
Depending on the equipment version, the  
function can only be used when driving for-  
ward.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Surround View, refer to page 265.  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 251.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
A yellow icon appears and the mal-  
functioning camera's detection range is  
shown in black on the control display.  
Panorama View  
Principle  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Panorama View gives you an earlier view of  
crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and in-  
tersections.  
Panorama View  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam-  
eras in the front and rear capture the side  
areas around the vehicle to improve the view.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the  
front and rear end of the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Depending on the equipment: rearview  
camera.  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Additional information:  
270  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
With the GPS coordinates.  
Display on the control display  
Press the button when the engine is run-  
ning.  
Using activation points  
The use of activation points can be switched  
on and off.  
Depending on the driving direction, the image  
of the respective camera is displayed:  
▷
▷
"Front": front camera image.  
"Rear": rear camera image.  
1.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the button.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross  
traffic warning can additionally warn of ap-  
proaching vehicles using radar sensors.  
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"  
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically  
when set activation points are reached."  
Additional information:  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272.  
Displaying activation points  
With navigation system: activation  
points  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
Principle  
3.  
"Manage points"  
Positions where Panorama View should switch  
on automatically can be stored as activation  
points provided that a Global Positioning Sys-  
tem signal is received.  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
Renaming or deleting activation points  
1.  
Press the button.  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3.  
"Manage points"  
Activation points can be used when driving for-  
ward for the front camera.  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
4. Select an activation point as needed.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive to the position at which the system is  
to be switched on, and stop.  
Functional limitations  
The Surround View functional limitations ap-  
ply.  
2.  
Press the button.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Activation point"  
Additional information:  
Surround View, refer to page 265.  
The current position is displayed.  
5. "Save activation point"  
System limits  
The limits of the Surround View system apply.  
Activation points are stored with one of the  
following pieces of information if possible:  
Additional information:  
271  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Surround View, refer to page 265.  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Cross traffic warning  
Overview  
Principle  
Button in the vehicle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
General information  
Park assistance button  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
Additional information:  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-  
sors are located in the front bumpers.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning on/off  
Activating/deactivating the system  
With the button  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
1.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the park assistance button.  
4. "Cross traffic warning"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
272  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
6. "Cross traffic warning"  
Turning on automatically  
If the system was activated on the control dis-  
play, it will automatically be turned on as soon  
as the Park Distance Control or the Panorama  
View is active and a gear is engaged.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Display in the Park Distance Control  
view  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front  
system is switched on when a forward gear is  
engaged.  
Switching off automatically  
The system is automatically switched off in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
When a certain distance travelled is ex-  
ceeded.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
▷
With an active parking operation of the Au-  
tomatic Parking Assistant.  
Warning  
Display in the camera view  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
273  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
Acoustic warning  
Data protection, refer to page 66.  
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning  
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into  
the respective direction.  
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile  
with an existing ConnectedDrive account  
must be activated.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Driver profiles, refer to page 67.  
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Switching the function on/off  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Switching on/off with other functions  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
Switching on/off individually  
Pre-adjustment  
Remote 3D View  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Principle  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the My  
BMW App and images from the Surround View  
cameras enable you to display the vehicle’s  
surroundings on a mobile device.  
5. "Select services individually"  
6. "My BMW App and portal"  
7. "Remote 3D View"  
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-  
tion.  
Turning on/off  
Sensors  
1. "CAR"  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. "Individual selection"  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Additional information:  
274  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully operational or  
may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
▷
With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields  
in the display indicate areas that are not  
recorded by the system.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
It may not be possible to use the function in  
every country.  
For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two  
hours.  
275  
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Selecting a program  
Vehicle features and options  
Using the button  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Press the button and select the de-  
sired program on the control display.  
Chassis components  
The chassis components are optimized for the  
vehicle and its application range and thereby  
ensure the best possible driving experience.  
Via iDrive  
It is possible to configure the required program  
for buttons M1 or M2.  
Adaptive M chassis  
1. "CAR"  
2.  
3. "Configure M1" or "Configure M2"  
4. "Chassis"  
"M menu"  
Principle  
This system reduces body movements with a  
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.  
5. Select the desired program.  
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv-  
ing comfort depending on the road condition  
and driving style.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
General information  
The system offers different shock absorber  
settings.  
▷
Program  
Shock absorber settings  
Comfort-oriented.  
Balanced out.  
▷
"COMFORT"  
"SPORT"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
"SPORT PLUS" Consistently sporty.  
When the display of the widget in the  
instrument cluster for M SETUP is ac-  
276  
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
tivated, the selected program is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to  
page 159.  
277  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Automatic climate control  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Air quality  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Climate control functions  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
Button  
Function  
Temperature.  
▷
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
Automatic recirculated-air control.  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
Air flow, manual.  
Intensity AUTO program.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
Defrost function.  
278  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Maximum cooling.  
Button  
Function  
AUTO program.  
Rear window defroster.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Seat and armrest heating, refer  
to page 127.  
Defrosting the windshield  
or  
Turning off  
Complete system:  
Active seat ventilation, refer to  
page 129.  
▷
Button on the driver's side:  
Press and hold the button until the  
integrated automatic climate con-  
trol switches off.  
Air conditioning.  
Open Climate menu such as  
for the following settings: up-  
per body temperature adjust-  
ment, pre-ventilation.  
▷
Button on the passenger's side:  
Press and hold the bottom button.  
Some of the functions can also be used via  
voice, e.g., temperature.  
Temperature  
Principle  
Opening the Climate menu  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
Press the button on the upper side.  
The Climate menu is displayed.  
For example, the following climate control  
functions can be accessed via the Climate  
menu:  
Setting the temperature  
Using the button:  
Press the upper or lower button side  
to set the desired temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
Air quality.  
Heating/ventilation.  
Pre-ventilation/heating  
Via iDrive:  
Individual settings can be entered for some of  
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in-  
tensity.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Temperature:"  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
8. "OK"  
Switching climate control functions  
on/off  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Do not rapidly change between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
Climate/air conditioning menu  
279  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Temperature of the ventilation  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "A/C"  
General information  
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper  
body area can be adjusted.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body  
area heats or cools noticeably, depending on  
the adjusted temperature.  
Air conditioning is switched on automatically  
with the AUTO program.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
Adjust temperature of the ventilation  
1. "CAR"  
Maximum cooling  
2. "Settings"  
Principle  
3. "Climate control"  
The system is set to the lowest temperature,  
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode  
with the drive-ready state switched on.  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Temperature adjustment"  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
Functional requirement  
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.  
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.  
The function is available at an outside temper-  
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Air conditioning  
Switching maximum cooling on/off  
Principle  
Press the button.  
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-  
midified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
The LED is illuminated when maxi-  
mum cooling is switched on.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. The air vents need to be open for this.  
Functional requirement  
The air flow can be adjusted with the program  
active.  
The interior can only be cooled with the drive-  
ready state switched on.  
AUTO program  
Switch air conditioning on/off  
Using the button:  
Principle  
Press the button on the lower side.  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
280  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The air flow, air distribution, and the temper-  
ature are controlled automatically depending  
on the interior and outside temperature and  
the desired temperature setting including the  
selected intensity.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
Switching the AUTO program on/off  
Using the button:  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Level"  
Press the button.  
7. Set the desired intensity.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
with the AUTO program switched on.  
The selected intensity is shown on the climate  
control display.  
Via iDrive:  
Convertible program  
When the convertible top is open, the  
convertible program is activated as well. In  
the convertible program, the automatic cli-  
mate control is optimized for driving with the  
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is  
increased as the vehicle speed increases.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Automatic"  
The efficiency of the convertible program can  
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de-  
flector.  
Depending on the selected settings and out-  
side influences, the air is directed to the wind-  
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the  
footwell.  
Automatic recirculated-air control  
Point the side air vents toward the side win-  
dows.  
Principle  
The air conditioning is switched on with the  
AUTO program.  
The automatic recirculated-air control recog-  
nizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside  
air supply is shut off and the interior air is recir-  
culated.  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the program so as to prevent window  
condensation as much as possible.  
General information  
If the system is activated, a sensor detects  
pollutants in the outside air and controls the  
shut-off automatically.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati-  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
Adjusting the intensity of the air flow  
With the AUTO program switched on, the in-  
tensity can be adjusted. This changes the au-  
tomatic control for the air mass.  
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin-  
uously flows into the interior.  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air  
quality in the interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
Using the button:  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase intensity.  
If there is window condensation, switch off re-  
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.  
281  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
If there is window condensation, switch off re-  
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.  
Switching automatic recirculated-air  
control on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Air flow, manual  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. "Automatic"  
Principle  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
General information  
Air recirculation mode  
To adjust the air flow manually switch off  
AUTO program first.  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase air flow.  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,  
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
Switch air recirculation on/off  
Using the button:  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Press the button.  
Manual air distribution  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the air-recirculation mode is switched  
on.  
Principle  
The air distribution for climate control can be  
adjusted manually.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Adjusting the air distribution manually  
2. "Settings"  
Press the button repeatedly. Select  
the desired setting:  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windows, upper body area, and footwell.  
Upper body area and footwell.  
Footwell.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Air recirculation"  
"Fresh air"  
Windows and footwell.  
Windows.  
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-  
air mode switches off automatically after a cer-  
tain amount of time, depending on the envi-  
ronmental conditions.  
Windows and upper body area.  
Upper body area.  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air  
quality in the interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the  
climate control display.  
282  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
SYNC program  
Rear window defroster  
Principle  
Principle  
The Sync program can be used to apply the  
settings on the driver's side to the passenger’s  
side.  
Ice and condensation are removed from the  
rear window quickly.  
Functional requirement  
The function is operational when the drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Switching the SYNC program on/off  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Switching rear window defroster on/off  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Synchronize"  
Press the button. The LED is illu-  
minated with rear window defroster  
switched on.  
The following settings of the driver's side can  
be transferred to the passenger's side:  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
AUTO program.  
Ventilation  
The program is switched off automatically if  
the settings on the front passenger side are  
changed.  
Principle  
The air flow directions can be adjusted individ-  
ually for direct or indirect ventilation.  
Defrost function  
Setting the ventilation  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed  
from the windshield and the front side win-  
dows.  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective climate control.  
Switching the Defrost function on/off  
Direct ventilation  
The air flow is directed towards the passen-  
gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,  
depending on the adjusted temperature.  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
Indirect ventilation  
The air flow is not directed towards the pas-  
sengers. The vehicle interior is warmed or  
cooled indirectly, depending on the set tem-  
perature.  
If there is window condensation, switch on the  
AUTO program or the air conditioning to utilize  
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air  
can flow to the windshield.  
283  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
Front ventilation  
▷
▷
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
There are different ways to switch the system  
on or off.  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Using the button  
Pre-ventilation  
Functional requirement  
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-  
ventilation can be switched on or off with the  
automatic climate control buttons.  
Principle  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated  
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-  
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air conditioning.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Defrosting the windshield  
Functional requirements  
Turning off  
Press and hold the bottom button.  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
The system switches off after leaving and lock-  
ing the vehicle.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. The system will be available  
284  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
Via iDrive  
Turning on  
The system is switched on once.  
1. "CAR"  
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
2. "Settings"  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Via BMW display key  
Activate departure times.  
Turning on  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting/activating the departure time  
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-  
ficient period of time for the climate control.  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
Setting the departure time  
4. "Activate now"  
5. "Start"  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
Turning off  
2. "Settings"  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
9. "OK"  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
4. "Stop"  
icon or the  
icon.  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
Via BMW display key  
Icon on the climate control  
display.  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Flashing: the pre-ventila-  
tion is switched on.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
Departure time  
4. Select the desired departure time.  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
7. "OK"  
Principle  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure.  
285  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Activating the departure time  
Safety information  
Functional requirement  
DANGER  
To switch on the pre-ventilation automatically  
at the departure time, the departure time must  
be activated first.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
stationary climate control in enclosed areas  
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in  
enclosed garages.  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
Via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Warning  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
When stationary climate control is in opera-  
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath  
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-  
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make  
sure that no combustible materials can come  
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-  
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,  
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible  
objects.  
3. Tap the  
icon or the  
icon.  
4. Tap on the icon.  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
,
Icon on the climate control display  
signals an activated departure time.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Functional requirements  
Principle  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-  
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable  
temperature. The system automatically cools,  
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-  
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may  
be removed more easily.  
▷
▷
Battery is sufficiently charged.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only  
be switched on twice consecutively. The  
system will be available again as soon as  
the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
▷
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
286  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Hood is closed.  
Press the button on the vehicle key three  
times within 1 second.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
After operating the vehicle key, it will take  
approximately 3 seconds until the engine is  
switched on.  
▷
Air vents are opened.  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
To switch off the system, press the button  
again three times.  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
once before using the system. Otherwise, the  
engine cannot switch on automatically to cli-  
matize the car's interior.  
Switching on via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Via iDrive:  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Activate now"  
5. "Start"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Remote Engine Start"  
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"  
7. Confirm the disclaimer.  
Switching off via BMW display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
Switching on/off directly  
4. "Stop"  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after  
approx. 15 minutes.  
Switching off with the Start/Stop  
button  
The system can be switched off directly as fol-  
lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without  
depressing the brake pedal.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system  
will be available again as soon as the drive-  
ready state is activated and deactivated again.  
Switching on via departure time  
Switching on via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
287  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The system is switched on once.  
4. Select the desired departure time.  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
7. "OK"  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activating the departure time via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
Activate departure times.  
The climate control function will start approx-  
imately 10 minutes before the set departure  
time and continue for approximately 5 more  
minutes after the departure time.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting/activating the departure time  
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-  
ficient period of time for the climate control.  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
Activating the departure time via BMW  
display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on once. The system will be available  
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti-  
vated and deactivated again.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
4. Activating the desired departure time:  
Tap on the icon.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.  
Display  
Adjusting the departure time via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
In the instrument cluster:  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to  
drive.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
The icon on the automatic climate  
control signals an activated departure time.  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start  
is running.  
Adjusting the departure time via BMW  
display key  
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display  
key.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
2. "Preconditioning setting"  
The parking lights are switched on as long as  
the system is switched on.  
3.  
Tap on the icon.  
288  
 

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
General settings
Personal settings
Connections
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Driving comfort
Climate control

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door
First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door
Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV Second Generation (2022-2026) Volvo XC40 SUV
Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fifth Generation (2023-2026) Toyota Prius 4 Door
Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door Fourth Generation (2016-2022) Toyota Prius 4 Door
→